Palm Treo 680 User guide

Your Palm

®

Treo

™

680

Smartphone

User Guide

Intellectual Property Notices

© 2006 Palm, Inc. All rights reserved. Blazer, HotSync, Palm, Palm

OS, Treo, VersaMail, and the Palm and Treo logos are among the trademarks or registered trademarks owned by or licensed to Palm,

Inc. This product contains ACCESS Co., Ltd.’s NetFront 3.0 Internet browser software. © 1996-2005 ACCESS Co., Ltd. and ACCESS

Systems America, Inc. NetFront is the trademark or registered trademark of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and in other countries except the United States of America. NetFront is a registered trademark of

NetFront Communications, Inc. in the United States of America and is used under a license. Documents To Go is a trademark or registered trademark of DataViz, Inc. A portion of the enclosed product is © copyrighted by Fraunhofer IIS (2005). All rights reserved.

All other brand and product names are or may be trademarks of, and are used to identify products or services of, their respective owners.

This product is protected by one or more of the following United

States patents:

7,007,239; 6,976,226; 6,975,304; 6,965,375; 6,961,567; 6,961,029;

6,957,397; 6,952,571; 6,950,988; 6,947,975; 6,947,017; 6,943,667;

6,940,490; 6,924,752; 6,907,233; 6,906,701; 6,906,741; 6,901,276;

6,850,780; 6,845,408; 6,842,628; 6,842,335; 6,831,662; 6,819,552;

6,804,699; 6,795,710; 6,788,285; 6,781,824; 6,781,575; 6,766,490;

6,745,047; 6,744,451; 6,738,852; 6,732,105; 6,724,720; 6,721,892;

6,712,638; 6,708,280; 6,697,639; 6,687,839; 6,685,328; 6,665,803;

6,618,044; 6,590,588; 6,539,476; 6,532,148; 6,523,124; 6,519,141;

6,516,202; 6,490,155; 6,480,146; 6,457,134; 6,456,247; 6,442,637;

6,441,824; 6,437,543; 6,429,625; 6,425,087; 6,389,572; 6,388,877;

6,381,650; 6,363,082; 6,344,848; 6,317,085; 6,241,537; 6,222,857;

6,185,423; 6,147,314; 6,115,248; 6,064,342; D421,251; D429,252;

D466,128; D478,091. Patent pending.

This product also is licensed under United States patent 6,058,304.

A portion of this software includes software modules developed by the Independent JPEG group. MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology is licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. MPEG-4 audio coding technology and advanced video technology licensed by

Fraunhofer IIS.

This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of

Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft.

The TREO trademark is used by Palm in Sweden and Denmark with the express consent of Pfizer and its affiliated companies. The products marketed and/or sold by Palm under the TREO trademark are in no way affiliated with Pfizer or its business.

Swedish: Varumärket Treo används av Palm i Sverige och Danmark med uttryckligt tillstånd från Pfizer och dess dotterbolag. De produkter som marknadsförs och/eller säljs av Palm under varumärket

Treo ska på inget sätt alls kopplas samman med Pfizer eller dess verksamhet.

Danish: Treo-varemærket anvendes af Palm i Danmark og Svirge med udtrykkelig tilladelse fra Pfizer og Pfizers associerede selskaber.

De produkter, der markedsføres og/eller sælges af Palm under

Treo-varemærket, er på ingen måde tilknyttet Pfizer eller Pfizers virksomhed.

Disclaimer and limitation of liability

Palm, Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any damage or loss resulting from the use of this guide. Palm, Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties that may arise through the use of this software. Palm, Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any damage or loss caused by deletion of data as a result of malfunction, dead battery, or repairs.

Be sure to make backup copies of all important data on other media to protect against data loss.

PN: 185-10425-00 v. 1.0

Contents

Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

What do I need to get started? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Chapter 1: Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Treo 680 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Inserting the SIM card and battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Maximizing battery life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Making your first call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Setting up your computer for synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Synchronizing information—the basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Chapter 2: Moving around on your Palm

®

Treo

™

680 smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Moving around the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Opening applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Chapter 3: Your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Turning your Treo 680 on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Receiving calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Using voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

What can I do when I’m on a call? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

How many minutes have I used? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Entering names and phone numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Defining favorite buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Using a hands-free device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

iii

iv

Customizing phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

What are all those icons? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Chapter 4: Your email and other messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Which email application should I use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

The VersaMail application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Chapter 5: Your connections to the web and wireless devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Connecting your computer to the Internet through your Treo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Connections with Bluetooth devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Chapter 6: Your photos, videos, and music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Pictures & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Pocket Tunes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Chapter 7: Your personal information organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Chapter 8: Your memos and documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Documents To Go Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Voice Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 9: Your application and info management tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Using Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Viewing and using the alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Viewing application info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Sending information with Bluetooth wireless technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Beaming information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Synchronizing information—advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Using expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Chapter 10: Your personal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

System sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Display and appearance settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Applications settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Locking your Treo and info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Connecting to a VPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Chapter 11: Common questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Desktop software installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Resetting your Treo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Hands-free devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Making room on your Treo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

v

vi

Third-party applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Where to learn more . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Welcome

Congratulations on the purchase of your

Palm

®

Treo

™

680 smartphone! In one compact and indispensable device, you now have all of the following:

•

•

•

•

•

Contacts application that stores the names, phone numbers, and even pictures of friends, family, business contacts—everyone you stay in touch with

Email application for receiving and sending email (business and personal)

Palm OS ® personal info applications for storing your appointments, to-do lists, memos, and more

Expansion card slot that accepts cards

(MultiMediaCard/SD/SDIO; sold separately) for storing music files, videos, dictionaries, games, and lots of other applications

A VGA (640x480) digital camera for snapping photos and capturing short videos

•

•

•

•

Text and multimedia messaging

MP3 player

Applications for reading, creating, and editing Microsoft Office files and viewing PDF files

Software for entering names, addresses, and more on your computer, and then transferring them to your smartphone with one press of a button

NOTE Phone and text messaging services require a service contract with your wireless service provider. Web, email, and multimedia messaging services require a service contract and data services, such as

GPRS or EDGE, from your wireless service provider. Data speeds vary based on network availability and capacity.

What’s in the box?

You should have received all the following items in the Treo 680 box:

Hardware

•

•

Treo 680

SIM card from your wireless service provider (not included with all models)

W E L C O M E 1

KEY TERM

SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card The smartcard that you insert into your smartphone and identifies you to the mobile network. It contains your mobile account information, such as your phone number and the services to which you subscribe. Phone book entries and SMS messages can also be stored on the SIM card.

•

•

•

•

Rechargeable battery

AC charger with international adapter(s)

(if required in your region)

USB sync cable

Headset

Documentation and software

•

Read This First setup booklet

•

•

•

Quick Reference Guide

Palm Software Installation CD, which includes the following:

•

Palm ® Desktop software

•

Bonus software for your smartphone

•

Your Palm Treo 680 Smartphone User

Guide (this guide)

Palm warranty

2 W E L C O M E

What do I need to get started?

This guide helps you set up your Treo 680 and quickly learn to use it. To get started, you need all the items that came in the

Treo 680 box (see What’s in the box? ), plus

the following:

•

A SIM card. If you do not already have a

SIM card and your smartphone box did

not contain a SIM card, you need to contact your wireless service provider to get one. Be sure to sign up for a mobile account with data services. To use your smartphone on your wireless service provider’s network, the SIM

•

•

• card must be inserted into your smartphone. Without a SIM card, you can only make emergency calls, such as

112 or 911.

You must be in a location where you are within coverage of your wireless service provider’s network.

An electrical outlet

The computer with which you want to synchronize your personal information

NOTE To use email, web browsing, and multimedia messaging, your wireless service provider plan must include data services. Please contact your wireless service provider for details about your data service options.

W E L C O M E 3

4 W E L C O M E

Setting up

Congratulations on the purchase of your new Palm ® Treo ™ 680 smartphone. You’re about to discover the many things about your smartphone that will help you better manage your life and have fun, too.

As you become more familiar with your smartphone, you’ll want to personalize the settings and add applications to make it uniquely yours. But first, take these few easy steps to set up your smartphone and get it running.

Benefits

•

Know where your smartphone controls are located

•

Start using your smartphone right away

•

Establish a link between your smartphone and your computer

C H A P T E R

1

In this chapter

Treo 680 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Inserting the SIM card and battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Charging the battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Maximizing battery life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Making your first call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Setting up your computer for synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Synchronizing information—the basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

S E T T I N G U P 1

Treo 680 overview

Front view

Indicator light (phone and charge indicator)

Earpiece 5-way navigator and

Center button

Power/End

Applications

Volume

Side button

Menu

Send

Phone

TIP

Protect your screen. Be careful to store your smartphone away from items that might scratch or crush the screen. Visit www.palm.com/treo680gsm to find carrying cases and other useful accessories.

Messaging

Calendar

DID YOU KNOW ?

When your smartphone screen is on, you can press and hold the Side button to open the Voice Memo application.

You can also change your button settings and select an application of your choice; see

Reassigning buttons for details.

7

1 S E T T I N G U P

Back view

Speaker

Stylus

Self-portrait mirror

Camera lens

Battery door release

Expansion slot door

IMPORTANT The Treo 680 speaker includes a large magnet, so be sure to keep your smartphone away from credit cards or other items that could be demagnetized.

Headset jack

Microphone Multi-connector

8

S E T T I N G U P 1

Top view

Infrared (IR) port Ringer switch

DID YOU KNOW ?

The Ringer switch silences all sounds at once. You don’t need to hunt for Off buttons all over the device.

NOTE Your SIM card may already be installed in your smartphone. Follow steps

1–3 to check. If a SIM card did not come with your smartphone, you may already have one; otherwise, your wireless service provider will give you one when you subscribe.

1 Use one hand to press the Battery

door release button and use your other hand to slide the battery door downward to remove it from your smartphone.

Battery door release

Inserting the SIM card and battery

Your SIM card contains account information such as your phone number and voicemail access number. To use the phone, email, or web features, the SIM card must be inserted in your smartphone.

2 If the battery is installed, remove it.

(See Replacing the battery for details.)

3 Slide the SIM tray out of the slot inside the smartphone. If the SIM card is already installed, skip to step 6.

9

1 S E T T I N G U P

10

4 Align the notch on the SIM card with the notch in the SIM tray. Insert the notched end of the SIM card into the

SIM tray, and then press the other end of the card until it falls into place.

Notch

6 Align the metal contacts on the battery with the contacts inside the battery compartment, insert the battery into the compartment at a 45-degree angle, and then press it into place.

Battery contacts

Smartphone contacts

5 Slide the SIM tray back into the slot inside the smartphone.

IMPORTANT Use the battery that came with your Treo 680. Do not use a battery from another Treo model in your Treo 680.

Similarly, do not use the Treo 680 battery in another Treo model. Using a battery that is designed for another Treo model can damage your Treo 680. For info on

S E T T I N G U P 1

replacement batteries, see Replacing the battery.

7 Slide the battery door onto the back of the smartphone until it clicks into place.

8 Your Treo screen wakes up and begins the setup process. When the language selection screen appears, select the language you want to use, and then follow the onscreen instructions to set up your Treo.

TIP

The power-saving feature turns off the Treo screen after a period of inactivity. To wake up the screen, press and release Power/End, and then press Center on the 5-way to turn off

Keyguard.

Charging the battery

TIP

If your Treo does not turn on, you need to connect it to the AC charger. If it still does not turn on after being connected to the AC charger for five minutes, then do a soft reset.

See Performing a soft reset.

IMPORTANT Always use the same language for your Treo, your computer operating system, and your desktop software. Otherwise, you may lose information or have difficulty with synchronization. Support is not provided for mismatched language setups.

The battery comes with a sufficient charge to complete the setup process and activate your phone. After activation, we recommend charging your smartphone for three hours (or until the indicator light is solid green) to give it a full charge. See

Maximizing battery life for tips on

maximizing the life of your Treo battery.

TIP

To avoid draining the battery, charge your smartphone every day, especially if you use your phone often.

DID YOU KNOW ?

If your battery ever becomes fully drained, your info is still stored safely on your smartphone until you recharge the battery or connect your smartphone to a power source.

11

1 S E T T I N G U P

1 If necessary, connect the international adapter to the AC charger plug.

2 Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.

3 Connect the charger cable to the bottom of your smartphone. Make sure the arrow on the connector is facing up, toward the screen.

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can also trickle charge your smartphone without the AC charger by connecting it to your computer with the sync cable. However, it takes longer to charge the battery without the AC charger, and if your laptop isn’t plugged into a power source, it can drain the laptop’s battery. For the quickest charge time, use the AC charger.

TIP

When trickle charging your smartphone with the sync cable, the indicator light may not turn on. To make sure the battery is charging, check the onscreen battery indicator.

4 To confirm that your smartphone is charging, check the indicator light on your smartphone.

•

Solid red indicates that your smartphone is charging.

•

Solid green indicates that your smartphone is fully charged.

Indicator light

12

S E T T I N G U P 1

TIP

If the battery is fully drained, it may take a few moments for the indicator light to turn on when you begin charging.

TIP

If the indicator light does not turn on when you connect your smartphone to the AC charger, double-check the cable connection and the electrical outlet to which it is connected.

TIP

To see exactly how much power is left in your battery, tap the onscreen battery icon.

Battery icon

When your Treo is on (see Turning your

Treo 680 on and off), the onscreen battery

icon displays the charging status:

A red lightning bolt indicates that the battery is connected to a wall outlet and is charging.

A green lightning bolt indicates that the battery is connected to a wall outlet and is fully charged.

A partial battery without a lightning bolt indicates that the battery is not connected to a wall outlet and it has some power.

An almost empty battery that is red at the bottom indicates that you need to charge the battery immediately.

Maximizing battery life

Battery life depends on how you use your smartphone. You can maximize the life of your battery by following a few easy guidelines:

IMPORTANT Use the battery that came with your Treo 680. Do not use a battery from another Treo in your Treo 680.

Similarly, do not use the Treo 680 battery in another Treo. Using a battery that is

13

1 S E T T I N G U P designed for another Treo can damage your

Treo 680. For info on replacement

batteries, see Replacing the battery.

•

•

TIP

You can buy an extra battery as a spare for long airplane trips or periods of heavy use. To purchase batteries that are compatible with your Treo 680, go to www.palm.com/ treo680gsm .

Charge your smartphone whenever you can. Charge it overnight. The battery has a much longer useful life when it is topped off frequently, rather than charging it after it is fully drained.

The wireless features (phone, email, messaging, and web) and media features (camera, media players, eBooks, and games) of your smartphone consume more power than its organizer features. Speakerphone usage also consumes more power than using the earpiece. If you use the wireless, speakerphone, and media features often, keep an eye on the battery icon and charge when necessary.

•

•

•

•

•

If you don’t plan to use the wireless features on your Treo for a while, turn

off your phone (see Turning your phone on and off) and let all calls be picked up

by voicemail.

As with any mobile phone, if you are in an area with no wireless coverage, your

Treo searches for a signal, which consumes power. If you cannot move to an area of better coverage, temporarily turn off your phone. While your phone is off, you can continue to use the nonwireless features of your Treo.

Turn down the screen brightness (see

Adjusting the brightness).

Decrease the settings in Power

Preferences and turn off Beam Receive

(see Optimizing power settings).

Turn off the Bluetooth ® feature if you’re

not using it. See Connecting to a

Bluetooth hands-free device.

14

S E T T I N G U P 1

Making your first call

1 Press Phone .

off Keyguard (see Locking your keyboard (Keyguard) for more info).

5 Press Send to dial the number.

6 If prompted, press Center

Yes and turn on your phone.

to select

Center

TIP

If Check SIM Card appears in the title bar,

see Inserting the SIM card and battery.

TIP

If No Service appears in the title bar, you’re outside a wireless coverage area. If you believe you are in a wireless coverage area and this problem persists, contact your wireless service provider for assistance.

TIP

If you are inside a coverage area and cannot complete a call, contact your wireless service provider for assistance.

7 After you finish the call, press Power/

End to end the call.

3 Press Left to select the Dial Pad tab.

4 Tap the onscreen Dial Pad to enter the number you want to call.

Adjusting call volume

While a call is in progress, press the

Volume button on the side of your smartphone to adjust the call volume.

•

To increase the volume, press the upper half of the Volume button.

15

1 S E T T I N G U P

•

To decrease the volume, press the lower half of the Volume button.

TIP

If your phone number doesn’t appear in

Phone Info, make sure your SIM card is properly inserted in your smartphone. If your phone number still does not appear in Phone

Info, your wireless service provider may not support this feature. Look for your phone number on the plastic holder to which the SIM card was attached. If you still need assistance, please contact your wireless service provider.

Volume

Side button

What’s my phone number?

1 Make sure your phone is on (see

Turning your phone on and off).

2 Press Phone .

3 Press Menu .

4 Select Options, and then select Phone

Info.

Look here for your phone number

Setting up your computer for synchronization

Why set up a connection between your smartphone and your computer? So you can synchronize. Why synchronize? Here are two good reasons:

•

It’s easier to enter names, phone numbers, and addresses using the big keyboard on your computer than the keyboard on your smartphone. Whether you enter or change information on your computer (using Palm

®

Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook for

16

S E T T I N G U P 1

•

Windows) or on your smartphone, you automatically update the info in both places when you synchronize. So there’s no need to enter the info twice.

You have a backup copy of all your info.

Should anything happen to your smartphone, your info still exists on your computer.

We strongly recommend that you synchronize your smartphone with your computer frequently to keep your information up-to-date (and backed up) in both locations.

Before you can synchronize, you need to install the desktop synchronization software and connect the sync cable to your computer.

System requirements

Your computer should meet the following minimum system profiles for Windows or

Mac computers:

•

Windows 2000 or XP (or later)

•

32MB of available memory (RAM)

•

170MB of free hard disk space

•

CD drive

•

•

Available USB port

Mac OS X version 10.2 or later

•

128MB of total memory (RAM)

•

190MB of free hard disk space

•

CD drive

•

Available USB port

Upgrading from another Palm OS

NOTE device

If you are setting up your first Palm

OS

®

device, skip ahead to Installing the desktop synchronization software.

®

You can transfer all compatible applications and information from your previous Palm

OS device—whether it’s a handheld or a

Treo— to your new Treo 680, so long as the space taken up by all the info you want to transfer is 64MB or less. This includes your calendar events, contacts, memos, and tasks, as well as your application settings and any compatible third-party applications and files.

When you install the desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD, some third-party applications may be quarantined because they are not compatible with the Palm OS software

17

1 S E T T I N G U P version 5.4.9 on your Treo 680.

Quarantined files are not installed on your

Treo 680, nor are they deleted; these files are placed in a new folder on your computer: C:\Program Files\Palm\<device name>\PalmOS5 Incompatible Apps.

(Can’t find a Palm folder in Program Files?

Then look for a folder labeled palmOne or

Handspring instead. For more info, see I can’t find my user folder.)

IMPORTANT Do not synchronize your Treo

680 with any previous versions of

Palm Desktop software.

TIP

We do not recommend using third-party utilities that back up your old device’s information onto an expansion card and then transfer the info to your Treo 680. Such methods transfer all applications to your smartphone, including ones that are not designed to work with Palm OS version 5.4.9.

1 Calculate how much space your apps and info occupy on your previous Palm

OS device:

•

In Applications View, open the menus.

•

Select Info on the App menu.

•

At the bottom of the screen, select

Size.

•

Look at the numbers on the Free

Space line and subtract the number on the left from the number on the right to calculate the space used. For example, on the device shown here,

22.4 – 17.5 = 4.9. This means that

4.9MB of space is occupied on this device.

2 If the space occupied on your previous device is 64MB or less, then go to step

3. If the space occupied is greater than

64MB, then do any of the following to reduce the storage space you’re using before you go to the next step:

•

Delete any third-party applications that you no longer use.

18

S E T T I N G U P 1

•

Move large files, such as eBooks and images, to an expansion card.

•

Move third-party applications to an expansion card.

•

Purge old info in applications such as

Calendar (Date Book), Tasks (To Do), and email. Refer to the documentation that came with your previous device for instructions on these items.

3 Synchronize your previous device with your previous desktop software to back up your information one last time.

4 Install the desktop synchronization software from your new Palm Software

Installation CD (see Installing the desktop synchronization software).

5 During the installation process, sync your Treo 680 with your new desktop software as instructed. When prompted, do the following:

•

Connect your Treo 680 to your

computer (see Connecting your smartphone to your computer).

•

Indicate whether you want to sync only the info in your PIM apps

(Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and

Tasks) or all info and apps (excluding apps known to be incompatible).

•

Select a device name for your Treo

680; be sure to select the same name that you used for your old device.

(This is the name that appears in the

User list in Palm Desktop software.)

6 MAC ONLY If you have pictures on your previous device, copy them from your previous device to an expansion card or beam them to your Treo 680.

7 If you plan to continue using your

previous device, perform a hard reset on your previous device to remove its associated device name. (See the documentation that came with your

previous device for instructions on performing a hard reset.) Each device you synchronize with your computer must have a unique name. The next time you synchronize your previous device with your computer, be sure to assign it a new name.

If any third-party applications are quarantined during the installation, do not manually install them. Contact the third-party developer for software updates

19

1 S E T T I N G U P and info about compatibility with your Treo

680.

TIP

If you have trouble upgrading or finding

quarantined files, see Upgrading.

1 Close any applications that are currently running on your computer, including those that are minimized. Your computer needs to have all its resources available to install the software.

2 Insert the Palm Software Installation CD into the CD drive on your computer.

Installing the desktop synchronization software

IMPORTANT Even if you already own a

Palm OS device and have installed a previous version of the desktop software, you must install the software from the

Palm Software Installation CD that came with your Treo 680.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN If you are installing on a computer at work, make sure your computer is configured to let you install new software. Contact your company’s

IT department for help.

TIP

If you want to sync info with applications other than Palm Desktop or Microsoft

Outlook, you need to purchase additional third-party sync software. This sync software is sometimes called a conduit.

3 If you are installing on a Mac, double-click the CD icon on the desktop, and then double-click the

Palm Software.pkg icon.

4 When the installation wizard opens, follow the onscreen instructions. Please

20

S E T T I N G U P 1

0 note these important points about the installation process:

•

When the language selection screen appears, select the same language you selected on your Treo 680.

• WINDOWS ONLY You can choose which desktop software you want to use for synchronization:

Palm Desktop software or Microsoft

Outlook.

NOTE Whether you select to synchronize with Microsoft Outlook or Palm Desktop software, Palm Desktop software is still installed on your computer. If you use

Outlook as your desktop email application, select Outlook as your desktop synchronization software. Remember that when you enter information on your computer, enter it in the software you selected in this step.

•

The install process prompts you to connect your smartphone to your computer. Go to the next section.

Connecting your smartphone to your computer

After you install the desktop software (see

Installing the desktop synchronization software), you’re ready to connect your

smartphone to your computer.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN To set up your computer, you need the sync cable that came with your Treo 680.

1 If necessary, connect the international adapter to the AC charger plug.

2 Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.

3 Plug the USB sync cable into an available USB port or a powered USB hub on your computer.

TIP

For best performance, plug your sync cable directly into a USB port on your computer. If your computer has USB ports on both the front and back, we suggest using the back port; the front port is often a low-power port. If you use a USB hub, make sure the hub has its own power supply.

21

1 S E T T I N G U P

4 With the sync button facing up, connect the sync cable to the bottom of your smartphone. Do not press the sync button until you are instructed to do so.

5 Connect the charger cable to the bottom of your smartphone.

You are now ready to synchronize; go to

Synchronizing information—the basics.

Sync cable Sync button

22

S E T T I N G U P 1

Synchronizing information—the basics

info up-to-date (and backed up) in both locations.

The info from all the following applications is updated by default each time you sync your smartphone with your desktop software:

Synchronizing means that info you enter or change in one place (your smartphone or your computer) is automatically entered or changed in the other; so there’s no need to enter the info twice. We strongly recommend that you sync your smartphone with your computer or corporate server frequently to keep your

0

Computer type

Windows

Desktop software

Microsoft Outlook

How each application syncs depends on your computer type and the desktop software you are using, as follows:

Windows

Mac

Palm Desktop

Palm Desktop

What syncs and where

•

•

Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and

Tasks sync with Outlook

Pictures & Videos syncs with

Palm Desktop

All apps sync with Palm Desktop

All apps sync with Palm Desktop

23

1 S E T T I N G U P

TIP

For more sync options, including which

apps sync, see Synchronizing information— advanced.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN To sync your info, you must install Palm Desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your Treo 680—even if you sync with Outlook or another third-party

application. See Installing the desktop synchronization software for instructions.

Messages on both your computer and your smartphone indicate that synchronization is in progress.

3 Wait until you see the message on your smartphone that the HotSync operation is complete; then disconnect the sync cable. Do not disconnect the sync cable until you see this message.

TIP

Problems synchronizing? See

Synchronization for troubleshooting

suggestions.

1 Connect your Treo 680 to your

computer, as described in Connecting your smartphone to your computer.

2 Press the sync button on the sync cable.

If you’re finishing your initial setup, you now have the option to install bonus software from the Palm Software

Installation CD. If you choose to install some of the bonus software, you need to sync again to install the software on your smartphone. You can also install bonus

software later; see Installing bonus software from the CD.

Sync button TIP

For info on locating your pictures and

videos on your computer, see Viewing pictures and videos on your computer.

24

Moving around on your

Palm

®

Treo

™

680 smartphone

C H A P T E R

2

Have you ever been to a new city and felt a bit lost until you figured out that the numbered streets run north/south and the avenues run east/west? Learning to move around on your smartphone is similar. Most Palm OS ® applications use the same set of controls. So once you learn how to use these controls on your Palm ® Treo ™ 680 smartphone, you’ll be driving all over town and you won’t even need a map.

Benefits

•

Find and open applications quickly

•

•

Access extra features with menus

Move around in applications with one hand, using the 5-way navigator

•

Access many more characters and symbols than are displayed on the keyboard

In this chapter

Moving around the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Opening applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® T R E O ™ 6 8 0 S M A R T P H O N E 2

Moving around the screen

To move around the Treo 680 screen, you can use the 5-way navigator for one-handed navigation, or you can tap items on the screen with the stylus. With use, you will find your own favorite way to scroll, highlight, and select menu items.

TIP

Some third-party applications may not work with the 5-way navigator, and you must use the stylus instead

DID YOU KNOW ?

In this guide, we use arrow icons to indicate directions on the 5-way.

These are different from any onscreen arrows that you tap with your stylus or select with the

5-way to display pick lists.

The 5-way includes the following buttons:

Center

Left

Up

Down

Right

27

2 M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® T R E O ™ 6 8 0 S M A R T P H O N E

Highlighting and selecting items

On most screens, one item—a button, a list entry, or a check box—is highlighted by default. The highlight identifies which item is affected by your next action. Use Left ,

Right , , and Down on the

5-way to move the highlight from one item to another.

TIP

If the item you want doesn’t appear on the screen, try tapping the onscreen scroll arrows to view more info.

Learn to recognize the highlight. It can take two forms:

Border glow: When an entire screen, an onscreen button (such as Done, New, or

OK), or a pick list is highlighted, a glow appears around its border. If an entire screen is highlighted, the glow appears at the top and bottom of the screen only.

Colored background: When a phone number, text, an email address, a web link, or an item in a list is highlighted, the item is displayed as white text against a colored background. Examples of lists include the

Contacts list, the Messaging Inbox, and the

Tasks list.

After highlighting an item, you can select or

TIP

When a border appears at the top and bottom of a list screen, press Center on the

5-way to highlight the first item in the list.

tapping the item with the stylus.

TIP

After you open an application (see

Opening applications), experiment with using

the 5-way to highlight various screen elements.

28


•

•

Highlighting text

You can use the stylus to highlight text on the screen.

•

Tap and drag the stylus across the text you want to highlight.

To highlight a word, double-tap it.

To highlight a paragraph, triple-tap it.

Selecting menu items

Many applications have menus to give you access to additional features. These menus are usually hidden from view, but they appear when you press Menu . To get the most out of your smartphone, it’s a good idea to familiarize yourself with the additional features available through the various application menus.

Accessing command buttons

In most applications, command buttons such as New, OK, and Details appear at the bottom of the screen. In many cases, you can jump directly to these buttons instead of scrolling to them.

•

•

•

1 Press Menu to display an application’s menus.

From a list screen, such as the Memos list, press Right to jump to the first button.

From a screen where you create or edit entries, such as Contact Edit, press

Center to jump to the first button.

From a dialog box, such as Edit

Categories, press Up to scroll to the buttons.

between menus.

Menu shortcut menu item.

4 Press Center to select the menu item, or press Menu to close the menu and cancel your selection.

29


TIP

Most menu items have menu shortcuts listed in the menu. To use a menu shortcut, press Menu plus the shortcut letter. You don’t have to see the menu item to use the menu shortcut. For example, when you’re in

Calendar, you can press Menu + N to create a new event.

•

To exit the pick list without making a or .

Stylus: Use your stylus to tap the pick list.

•

•

Tap the item you want from the list.

To exit the pick list without making a selection, tap outside the list.

Selecting options in a pick list

A range of options is often presented in a type of menu called a pick list, which can be identified by a downward-pointing arrow. Pick lists are different from the application menus previously described.

The application menus give you access to additional features and pick lists let you select the contents for a particular field.

You can select items from a pick list with the 5-way or the stylus.

5-way: Use the 5-way to highlight the display the items in the list.

•

• the item you want.

Press Center highlighted item. to select the

30


Using the keyboard

Backlight

Backspace

Return

Menu

Option

Shift/Find

Space

NOTE Your keyboard may have a different layout based on the country where you purchased your smartphone.

Alt

31


TIP

When using the keyboard, most people find it easiest to hold the Treo with two hands and use the tips of both thumbs to press the keys.

•

To turn Caps Lock on, press Shift/

Find twice. To turn it off, press

Shift/Find once. When Caps Lock is on, an underlined up arrow appears in the lower-right corner of the screen.

DID YOU KNOW ?

The Treo 680 includes a keyboard backlight that turns on and off when the screen turns on or off. The backlight also dims when an active call lasts longer than a

specified period of time. See Optimizing power settings to adjust the automatic

shut-off and dimming intervals.

Entering numbers, punctuation, and symbols

Numbers, punctuation, and symbols appear above the letters on the keys.

To enter these characters, do one of the following:

Entering lowercase and uppercase letters

•

To enter lowercase letters, press the desired keys.

•

To enter an uppercase letter, press

Shift/Find and then press a letter key. You don’t need to press and hold

Shift/Find while entering a letter.

When Shift is active, an up arrow appears in the lower-right corner of the screen.

•

To turn Option Lock on, press Option

twice. To turn it off, press Option

once. When Option Lock is on, the

Symbol

Letter

•

Press Option , and then press the key with the desired character shown above the letter. You don’t need to press and hold Option while pressing the second key. When Option is active, the symbol appears in the lower-right corner of the screen.

symbol appears in the lower-right corner of the screen.

32


DID YOU KNOW ?

Some application views automatically default to Option Lock, such as the Dial Pad tab in the Phone application or the Calculator. In this case, you do not need to press Option to enter numbers.

1 Enter the character that corresponds to the symbol or accented character you want. See the table on the next page.

2 Press Alt .

Entering other symbols and accented characters

Symbols and accented characters that do not appear on the keyboard are available by using the Alt key.

to highlight the desired character.

4 Press Center character.

to insert the

DID YOU KNOW ?

Alternate characters are grouped by their similarity to the base key. For example, the alternate characters for the e key are é, è, ë, and ê.

33


0

Symbols and accented characters

Enter… b or B c i

E

C e a

A

Then press

Alt to select…

á à ä â ã å æ

Á À Ä Â Ã Å Æ

ß

ç ¢ ©

Ç ¢ ©

é è ë ê

É È Ë Ê

í ì ï î

Enter… n

N o

O s

S p or P r or R t or T

Then press

Alt to select…

ñ

Ñ

¶

®

ß š

ß Š

™

Enter… u

U

ó ò ö ô œ õ x or X

Ó Ò Ö Ô Œ Õ y

:

?

Y

!

$

Then press

Alt to select…

ú ù ü û

Ú Ù Ü Û x ¤

ý ÿ

Ý Ÿ

¡

¿

:-) :-( ;-)

£ ¥ ¢ I l or L

Í Ì Ï Î

£

Press Alt by itself, after a space or at the beginning or end of a line, to select these characters:

; _ • \ % = ° ÷ £ ¥ ¢ [ ] { } < > « » © ® ™ ~ ^ ø |

34


Opening applications

When you open an application using a quick button or Applications View, you automatically close the app you were previously using.

Using the quick buttons

The front of the Treo 680 has three quick buttons—Phone, Calendar, and

Messaging—that open applications. The fourth button opens Applications View (see

Using Applications View).

TIP

You can customize the quick buttons

yourself; see Reassigning buttons for details.

Phone

Calendar

Applications

Messaging

35


Each of quick button opens two applications:

•

To access a button’s primary application, simply press the button.

Using Applications View

You can access all available applications through Applications View.

1 Press Applications .

Button Primary app

Phone

Calendar

Messaging

TIP

If prompted, press Center on the 5-way to

turn off Keyguard (see Locking your keyboard

(Keyguard) for more info).

2 Use the 5-way to highlight the application you want to use.

•

To access a button’s secondary application, press Option and then press the quick button.

Buttons

+

+

+

Secondary app

Web

Memos

Email

DID YOU KNOW ?

Pressing Option + Menu dims your smartphone screen.

3 Press Center application.

to open the selected

In Applications View, you can also do any of the following:

36


•

•

Press Applications repeatedly to cycle through various categories of

applications. See Applications settings

for more info on categories.

Enter the first few letters of the application’s name to highlight it. For example, if you press P, it highlights

Phone; if you then press R, it highlights

Prefs. If you pause and then press R, it highlights the first application that starts with R.

37


38

Your phone

The Phone application is your home base for making and receiving calls and for storing info about the people you need to stay in touch with.

You can creatively manage multiple calls, such as swapping between calls, sending text messages to ignored calls, and creating conference calls with up to five callers. Your Palm ® Treo ™ 680 smartphone helps you perform all these tasks with ease.

And you can do more than manage your phone calls, too. You can send text messages, open applications, go to your favorite web pages, see your upcoming appointments, and even find out how many unread email messages you have.

Benefits

•

Stay in touch—you choose how

•

Save time with shortcuts to your favorite info

•

Have fun: add wallpaper and ringtones

C H A P T E R

3

In this chapter

Turning your Treo 680 on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Receiving calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Using voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

What can I do when I’m on a call? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

How many minutes have I used?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Entering names and phone numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Defining favorite buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Using a hands-free device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Customizing phone settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

What are all those icons? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Y O U R P H O N E 3

Turning your Treo 680 on and off

1 Press and release Power/End to wake up the screen.

TIP

You can also press any of the quick buttons or the Applications button to wake up your smartphone screen.

NOTE Throughout this guide we use the term smartphone to describe your device and its physical aspects. We use the term

phone to describe the feature of your Treo that lets you connect to your wireless service provider network to make and receive calls and transmit data.

Power/End

Center

The phone and the screen of your Treo 680 can be turned off and on separately. This means that you can wake up the screen to use just the organizer features of your smartphone, without turning on the phone.

Also, when the screen is turned off, the phone can be on and ready for you to receive and make calls.

2 Press Center to turn off Keyguard.

For more info about turning Keyguard on

and off, see Locking your keyboard

(Keyguard).

3 Press and release Power/End to turn off the screen and lock the keyboard.

Waking up the screen and turning it off

Wake up the screen and leave the phone turned off when you want to use only the organizer features of your Treo 680; for example, when you’re on a plane and want to look at your calendar.

TIP

You can set how long the screen stays on.

Press Applications, select Preferences, select Power, and then adjust the Auto-off

after setting.

41

3 Y O U R P H O N E

Turning your phone on and off

When your phone is on, it is connected to your wireless service provider’s network

(provided you are in a coverage area) so that you can make and receive phone calls and use wireless services, such as email, messaging, and the web browser. During initial setup, your phone is automatically turned on, so you can use wireless go to the Main tab of the Phone application and you see the Signal

Strength screen.

icon at the top of the

TIP

If you’re outside a coverage area, No

Service appears in the upper-left corner and the indicator light flashes red.

services right away. 3 Press and hold Power/End again to turn off your phone.

If you turn off your phone, you can still use the organizer features such as Calendar

You know your phone is off when you go to the Main tab of the Phone and Contacts, as well as the media features such as Pocket Tunes and Pictures application and you see Phone Off at the top of the screen.

& Videos. You might hear this referred to as

flight mode because you must turn your phone off when you’re on a plane.

turn on your phone.

Opening the Phone application

1 Wake up the screen.

Press Phone to display the Main tab in the Phone application.

to

Status icons

TIP

If the Ringer switch is in the Sound On position, you hear a series of tones when you

turn your phone on and off (see Silencing sounds).

You know your phone is on and that you’re inside a coverage area when you

Tabs

42

Y O U R P H O N E 3

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can choose which tab appears when you press the Phone button.

See Customizing the Main tab in the Phone application for details. If you change the

default tab, you need to modify the steps in this chapter accordingly.

Making calls

4 Press Send to make the call.

There are several ways to make a call. Try them all to find out which way you like best.

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can paste numbers directly into the Dial Pad. Copy a number from another application, press Phone and select the Dial Pad tab. Open the Edit menu and select Paste. Press Send to dial the number.

Dialing using the onscreen Dial Pad

1 Press Phone .

3 Enter the phone number by tapping the onscreen Dial Pad with the stylus.

Dialing using the keyboard

1 Press Phone .

2 Press the numbered keys to enter the phone number. (You don’t need to press

Option.)

TIP

Press Backspace to delete numbers you’ve entered. To cancel the call altogether, press Phone to return to the Main tab in the

Phone application.

43

3 Y O U R P H O N E


TIP

After you enter a phone number, you can also press Center on the 5-way to select whether you want to make a phone call or send a text message to that number.

Dialing by contact name

You need to have names and numbers in your contact list before you can make a call by contact name. You can add contacts

directly into your smartphone (see Adding a contact), but the fastest way to enter lots

of contacts is to enter them in your desktop software and then synchronize to transfer them to your smartphone (see

Synchronizing information—the basics).

You can also import contacts from your

SIM card (see tip on Viewing your SIM

Phonebook).

1 Press Phone .

2 Select the Contacts tab.

3 Using the keyboard, just start entering one of the following for the contact you want to call:

•

First name (JOH for John)

•

Last name (SMI for Smith)

•

First initial and last name (JSM for

John Smith)

For example, entering SM would display

Smilla Anderson, John Smith, and

Sally Martin. Entering JSM finds only

John Smith.

Text appears here as you enter it

44

Y O U R P H O N E 3

TIP

To restart your search, press Backspace to delete letters you’ve entered. Or press Phone to return to the Main tab in the Phone application.

Look for the icon to distinguish a speed-dial favorite from other types of favorites.

4 Select the number you want to dial.


TIP

To see more info for a contact, highlight the name and press Center on the 5-way to view the address, company, and other details.

DID YOU KNOW ?

If you want to be able to search for a contact by entering a name from the Main tab in the Phone application, you can

change a setting to do that (see Customizing phone settings).

TIP

To view more favorite buttons, repeatedly press Down on the 5-way.

Dialing with a speed-dial favorite button

Your smartphone comes with a few predefined speed-dial favorite buttons, but you can also create your own favorites. See

Creating a speed-dial favorite button.

1 Press Phone .

TIP

You can see all the contact numbers for the selected person or business. Highlight a

speed-dial favorite button and press Space on the keyboard.

make the call.

3 Use the 5-way to highlight the speed-dial favorite you want.

45

3 Y O U R P H O N E

Dialing from a web page or message

Your Treo recognizes most phone numbers that appear on web pages or in text, email, or multimedia messages.

1 Select the phone number on the web page or in the message.

Redialing a recently called number

To dial the last number: Select the

Main tab, and then press and hold

Send called.

to dial the last number you

To select from your most recently dialed

numbers: Select the Main tab, press

Send to open the Redial list, highlight the number you want to call, and then press Send make the call.

again to

TIP

If you can’t use the 5-way or stylus to highlight and dial a phone number on a web page or in a message, it means that your Treo doesn’t recognize the number as a phone number. You can still use the menus to copy and paste the number into the Dial Pad.

To select from your call history list:

Select the Call Log tab, highlight the number you want to call, and then press

Send to dial the number.

2 Press Center to open the Dial

Number dialog box.

3 Select Dial to make the call.

46

Y O U R P H O N E 3

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can send a text message from Contacts or your Call Log by highlighting a number, pressing Center on the 5-way, and then selecting Message.

TIP

See a photo of the person calling you!

Learn how to assign a caller ID photo in

Assigning a caller ID photo.

Receiving calls

To receive calls, your phone must be on.

This is different from having only the

screen turned on (see Turning your phone on and off). When your phone is off, your

calls go to voicemail.

To answer a call, do one of the following:

•

•

•

Press Send .

Select Answer.

Press the headset button (if the headset is attached).

TIP

The headset button may work differently on headsets other than the one provided with your smartphone.

DID YOU KNOW ?

If music is playing and a call arrives, the music pauses automatically and resumes when you hang up or ignore the call.

NOTE Pressing Phone silences the ringer, but it does not answer the call.

47

3 Y O U R P H O N E

To ignore a call, do one of the following:

Send the call to voicemail: Press Power/

End or select Ignore.

Send the caller a text message: Select

Ignore with Text. This option sends the call to voicemail and opens a text message addressed to the caller.

NOTE Sending text messages to land line phones may not be supported.

Using voicemail

Your wireless service may include voicemail. Keep in mind that airtime and other charges may apply when using voicemail from your phone.

To silence the phone while it is ringing, do one of the following:

•

•

Press any key on your Treo except Send,

Power/End, or the 5-way.

Slide the Ringer switch to the Sound

Off position. This immediately silences all system sounds, including the ringer.

Setting up voicemail

1 Press Phone .

2 Press and hold 1 to dial your wireless service provider’s automated voicemail system.

TIP

You can also access your wireless service provider’s voicemail system by selecting the

Favorites tab and then selecting the

Voicemail favorite.

3 Follow the voice prompts to set up your voicemail.

DID YOU KNOW ?

When you silence the ringer while it is ringing, you can either answer the call or let it ring through to voicemail.

TIP

If you can’t connect to your wireless service provider’s voicemail system, contact your wireless service provider for assistance.

48

Y O U R P H O N E 3

Voicemail notification

When you have a new voicemail message, you are notified with an Alert dialog box.

Listening to voicemail messages

1 Press Phone .

2 Press and hold 1 to dial the voicemail system.

TIP

You can also select the Voicemail favorite button to dial the voicemail system.

3 Enter your voicemail password using the keyboard.

TIP

Remember, you don’t need to press

Option to enter numbers, *, or # during a call.

•

•

To dismiss the Alert dialog box, select

OK.

To play the message, select Listen.

When you have messages that you have not listened to, a Voicemail icon also appears in the title bar of the Phone application. You can also select this icon to listen to your voicemail.

NOTE If you defined Extra Digits for the

Voicemail favorite button (see Editing a favorite button for details), you can select

this button to enter your password.

49

3 Y O U R P H O N E

What can I do when

I’m on a call?

When you make or receive a call, Active

Call View appears.

TIP

If the screen dims during a call, press any key except Send or Power/End to restore the screen brightness.

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can set how long the screen stays at full brightness during phone

calls. See Optimizing power settings for

details.

Button label

Caller’s name and number

Call duration

Call status

0

Use the 5-way or stylus to select the onscreen buttons. Here’s what the buttons do:

Turns on the speakerphone, which means that you and everybody around you can hear the call. (Of course, the caller can hear you as well.) The advantage is that you can check your calendar, look up contact info, take notes, and use other features during a call. This button is not available when you use a headset.

Turns off the speakerphone when it is on.

Replaces the Speakerphone button when you use a Bluetooth ® hands-free device. Select this button to stop using the hands-free device and switch to holding your smartphone to your ear.

Puts a call on hold, and the call status changes to On Hold. To take the call off hold, select this button again.

50

Y O U R P H O N E 3

Lets you make another call while

the first call is on hold; see Making a second call for details. For info on

handling a second incoming call,

see Receiving a second call (call waiting).

Opens the Dial Pad so you can use it to dial additional numbers, such as an extension or a response to a voice prompt.

Dials any extra digits (such as a password or an extension) that you assigned to a speed-dial favorite

button. See Defining favorite buttons for information on defining

extra digits. This button disappears after you select it to dial the numbers.

Mutes the microphone so that you and the noise around you can’t be heard on the other end. The call status changes to Muted. When you want to speak, be sure to select the Mute button again.

DID YOU KNOW ?

Do you accidentally press onscreen buttons when you’re on a call? You can disable the screen’s touch-sensitive

feature during phone calls, see Locking your screen.

Ending a call

Do one of the following:

•

•

Press Power/End .

Press the button on the headset (if the headset is attached).

Switching applications during a call

You can use your organizer apps and other applications while you’re talking on the phone; so go ahead and check your calendar, or go to Memos and enter the driving directions your caller is giving you.

You can even send text messages while you’re on a call.

NOTE What you can’t do, however, is make a data connection while on a call.

This means that you can’t browse the web or send or receive email or multimedia messages.

51

3 Y O U R P H O N E

1 (Optional) If you want to continue talking while viewing another application, select Speakerphone or

connect a headset (see Using a hands-free device).


3 Select the icon for the application you want to open.

4 When you’re ready to leave the app, open another app or press Phone to return to Active Call View.

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can press Phone to toggle between Active Call View and the Main tab in the Phone app, so you can access other tabs, such as Contacts and Favorites, during a call.

TIP

You can turn the Add New Number prompt on and off. In Contacts, open the Options menu, and select Preferences. To turn this option on, check the Ask to add unknown

phone numbers after calls box. To turn this option off, uncheck this box.

Saving phone numbers

After you complete a call to a number that is not in your Contacts list, you are prompted to add the number to your

Contacts list.

•

•

•

To create a new contact entry for this number, select Create a New Contact, and enter the contact’s info.

To add this number to an existing contact entry, select Add to a Contact, and then select the contact. This pastes the number into the first available phone number field for that contact.

To decline adding this number, select

Cancel.

52

Y O U R P H O N E 3

•

To disable the Add New Number prompt, check the Don’t ask me this

again box, and then select Cancel.

If you don’t add a number right away, follow these steps to add it later.

1 Press Phone .

NOTE To do this, you can use any of the

methods described in Making calls.

5 When the Dial another call prompt appears, select Yes.

6 Select Swap to switch between the two calls.

3 Highlight the number you want to save.

4 Press Menu .

5 Select Add Contact.

6 Select New to create a new contact, or select Add to add this number to an existing contact.

7 Enter the information for the entry, and then select Done.

Making a second call

You can make a second call while your first call is still active.

1 Dial the first number and wait until the person answers.

2 Put the first call on hold by pressing

Send or selecting Hold .

3 Select Add Call .

4 Dial the second number.

7 To end the active call, press Power/End

.

DID YOU KNOW ?

When you hang up one call, you can continue your conversation with the remaining call.

Receiving a second call (call waiting)

When you are on a call, you can receive a second call and have separate conversations with each caller. When the second call comes in, you hear a call

53

3 Y O U R P H O N E waiting tone and the Call Waiting dialog box appears. You can do any of the following to handle the second call:

•

•

•

To place the current call on hold and answer the new call, press Send

or select Answer.

To send the new call to voicemail, select

Ignore.

To send the new call to voicemail and send the caller a text message, select

Ignore with Text.

NOTE Sending text messages to land line phones may not be supported.

in your mobile account may be deducted for each call included in the conference call.

1 While the first call is active, make a second call.

2 Select Conference . This joins you and the two calls in a conference call.

•

•

To hang up the current call and answer the new call, press Power/End .

To switch between the original call and the second call you answered, select

Swap or press Send .

Making a conference call

You can join a total of five other calls in a conference call, provided that your network and service plan include 6-way conferencing. Please contact your wireless service provider for more information.

Additional charges may apply and minutes

3 To add more calls to the conference, select Hold , dial another number, and then select Conference the new call.

to add

4 To end the conference, make sure the conference is the active call, and then press Power/End .

54

Y O U R P H O N E 3

TIP

If you want to continue a conversation with one of the people on a conference call, you can extract that call from the conference.

Select Extract Call (the onscreen button on the far right), and then select the call you want to extract.

Forwarding all calls

You can forward all your calls to another telephone number. You can also selectively

forward certain calls (see Forwarding calls under certain conditions). Please check

with your wireless service provider about availability and pricing of forwarded calls, as additional charges may apply.

1 Press Phone .

2 Press Menu .

3 Select Options, and then select Call

Preferences.

4 Select the Forward all calls pick list.

•

If the forwarding number appears in the pick list, select the number.

•

If the forwarding number does not appear in the pick list, select Edit

Numbers, and then select New.

Enter a forwarding number, including the area code and country code if they are different from your mobile phone number. Select OK. Select the number you just entered, and then select OK.

5 Select OK.

TIP

After you set the number you want to forward all your calls to, the call forwarding

icon appears in the title bar (see What are all those icons?). We also recommend that you

call your Treo 680 to confirm that your call forwarding settings work properly.

TIP

To turn off forwarding for all calls, select

Off from the Forward all calls pick list.

Forwarding calls under certain conditions

You can forward calls to another number when the line is busy, a call is unanswered, your smartphone is off, or you are outside a coverage area.

55

3 Y O U R P H O N E

1 Press Phone .

2 Press Menu .


Preferences.

4 Select the Forward all calls pick list and select Off.

5 Select any of the following pick lists:

When busy: Forwards calls if the phone is busy.

Not answered: Forwards calls if you do not answer.

Off/No service: Forwards calls when your smartphone is not connected to a mobile network.

6 If the forwarding number appears in the pick list, select the number. If the forwarding number does not appear in the pick list, select Edit Numbers and then select New. Enter a forwarding number, and select OK. Select the number you just entered.

7 Select OK, and then select OK again.

How many minutes have I used?

1 Press Phone .

3 Press Menu .

4 Select Totals from the Record menu.

5 (Optional) To reset the counters to zero, select Reset Counters.

6 Select Done.

56

Y O U R P H O N E 3

Entering names and phone numbers

Contacts is where you enter information about the people you want to stay in contact with. You can get to this info from the Phone application, to dial phone numbers and create favorites, and from the

Messaging and email applications, to send messages. When you create a contact, you can also assign a photo and ringtone ID to that contact, so you know when they call you.

DID YOU KNOW ?

If you add a symbol at the beginning of a contact’s last name, such as

#Smith, the contact appears at the top of your contact list.

Adding a contact

1 Press Phone .

2 Select the Contacts tab.

3 Press Menu .

4 Select New Contact from the Record menu.

5 Use the 5-way to move between fields as you enter info.

6 Do any of the following:

Add a caller ID photo: Select the

Picture box. (See Assigning a caller ID photo for more info.)

Add a caller ID ringtone: Select the

Ringtone pick list. (See Assigning a caller ID ringtone for more info.)

Place the entry in a category and

mark it private: Select Details. (See

Working with private entries for more

info.)

57

3 Y O U R P H O N E

Add a note to an entry: Select Note

.

Display additional fields for this

contact: Select Plus .

7 After you enter all the information, select Done.

TIP

To edit the entries on your SIM card you must either Import them into Contacts or press Applications, select SIM Book, and edit them in the phone book on your SIM card.

5 Select Edit.

6 Make changes to the entry as necessary, and then select Done.

TIP

Import contacts from your SIM card quickly and easily. In the Contacts list, open the Record menu and select Import from

SIM.

Assigning a caller ID photo

1 Press Phone .

Viewing or changing contact information

1 Press Phone .

3 Begin entering one of the following for the contact you want to view or edit:

•

First name (JOH for John)

•

Last name (SMI for Smith)

•

First initial and last name (JSM for

John Smith)

4 Select the name of the entry you want to open.

3 Open the contact you want to add the

photo to (see Viewing or changing contact information).

4 Select Edit.

5 Select the Picture box and do one of the following:

•

Select Camera to take a photo and add it to this contact entry when you save the photo.

•

Select Photos and select an existing photo that you want to assign to this contact.

58

Y O U R P H O N E 3

1 Press Phone .

3 Open the contact to whom you want to

give a caller ID ringtone (see Viewing or changing contact information).

4 Select Edit.

5 Select the Ringtone pick list and select a tone for this contact entry.

6 Select Done.

DID YOU KNOW ?

If you assign pictures to your contacts in Microsoft Outlook or

Palm Desktop software and you install the desktop software from the Palm Software

Installation CD, the pictures are automatically added to your contact entries on your smartphone when you sync. If you use third-party synchronization software, picture sync may not be supported. Check with the software developer for information.

Assigning a caller ID ringtone

Caller ID ringtones can let you know who is calling before you even look at your smartphone. This is a great way to identify calls from important people in your life and to screen calls that you’d prefer not to answer.

6 Select OK.

TIP

You can assign a ringtone to an entire category of contacts. For example, use a special ringtone for categories such as Family,

Work, or Golf Buddies. Select the category pick list in the upper-left corner and select Edit

Categories. Select the category, and then select Edit. Select the ringtone on the Edit

Category screen.

59

3 Y O U R P H O N E

Customizing Contacts

1 Press Phone .

3 Press Menu .

4 Select Options, and then select

Preferences.

5 Set any of the following options:

Remember Last Category: Sets whether Contacts opens to the last category you selected.

Show SIM Phonebook: Sets whether

SIM Phonebook appears as an option in the category pick list. When you check this box, you can view entries in the phone book on your SIM card.

Ask to add unknown phone numbers

after calls: Sets whether you are prompted to add phone numbers that are not in your Contacts list after a call.

You can add unknown numbers to an existing contact or create a new contact entry.

List By: Sets whether the Contacts list is sorted by last name or company name.

Deleting a contact

1 Open the contact you want to delete.

2 Press Menu .

3 Select Delete Contact from the Record menu, and then select OK.

Creating a business card for beaming

1 Create a new contact and enter your own business card info.

2 Open the contact entry containing your business card info.

3 Press Menu .

4 Select Select Business Card from the

Record menu.

TIP

After you create your business card, you can beam it to another device with an IR port—provided the device supports beaming with Palm OS ® devices. Go to Contacts or the

Main tab in the Phone application, open the

Record menu, and then select Beam

Business Card.

60

Y O U R P H O N E 3

Viewing your SIM Phonebook

1 Press Phone .

Defining favorite buttons

3 Press Menu .


Preferences.

5 Make sure the Show SIM Phonebook box is checked.

6 Select OK.

7 In the Contacts list, select the category pick list at the top of the screen and select SIM Phonebook.

•

•

•

•

Your Treo provides an unlimited number of favorite buttons for quick access to the following common tasks:

•

Dialing a phone number (speed-dial)

Opening an application

Accessing a web page

Addressing a message (text, MMS, or email)

Accessing voicemail (preset on your

Treo)

TIP

If you imported contacts from your SIM card to Contacts, you may want to uncheck the Show SIM Phonebook box to avoid seeing duplicate entries.

TIP

Need to copy a contact to your phone book on your SIM card? In Contacts, select the contact you want to copy, open the

Record menu, and then select Export to

SIM.

TIP

Your wireless service provider may preset favorite buttons on your smartphone that are customized for their services.

61

3 Y O U R P H O N E

5 Enter a label for the favorite:

•

If the entry is for an existing contact, select Lookup. Start entering the last name of the contact, and select the contact when it appears in the lookup list.

•

If the entry is for a new contact, enter the label, press Down , and enter the number.

DID YOU KNOW ?

If you’re upgrading from a Treo

600/650, most of your favorites should transfer from your old Treo along with your other info. However, you may need to rearrange the order in which your favorites appear by opening the Record menu and then selecting Organize Favorites. For more info

about upgrading, see Upgrading from another

Palm OS ® device.

Creating a speed-dial favorite button

1 Press Phone .

3 Press Menu .

4 Select New Favorite on the Record menu.

6 (Optional) Enter a Quick Key.

KEY TERM

Quick Key A letter that you can press and hold to activate a favorite from any tab in the Phone app. For example, create a speed-dial button for your mother’s number and enter the letter M for “Mom” as the

Quick Key. Then when you want to call her, go to the Phone app and press and hold M. Your smartphone dials the number.

62

Y O U R P H O N E 3

7 (Optional) Select More, and then select advanced options:

Extra Digits: Defines additional digits to dial, such as a password or extension.

To enter a one-second pause, insert a ,

(comma) between digits. To add a longer pause, either enter more commas, or enter a p to add a 3-second pause.

Dial Extra Digits Automatically: Dials predefined extra digits immediately after dialing the phone number, when checked.

8 Select OK.

1 Press Phone .

3 Press Menu .

4 Select New Favorite on the Record menu.

5 Select the Type pick list and select

Application, Message, Email, or Web

Link.

6 Enter a label for the favorite and enter any other necessary information on the screen.

7 (Optional) Enter a Quick Key.

8 Select OK.

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can assign a special

ringtone for a contact. See Assigning a caller

ID ringtone for details.

Editing a favorite button

1 Press Phone .

Creating other types of favorite buttons

DID YOU KNOW ?

When creating a Message or

Email favorite, you can enter multiple addresses; simply separate each address with a comma. This is an easy way to send messages to a group of people.

3 Highlight the favorite button you want to edit.

4 Press Menu .

5 Select Edit Favorite on the Record menu.

6 After you make your changes, select

OK.

63

3 Y O U R P H O N E

TIP

To arrange your favorites, open the Record menu and select Organize Favorites.

Highlight the favorite you want to move, and then press and hold Option + Up or Down to move the button to another position. Select

Done.

Using a hands-free device

Deleting a favorite button

TIP

Some favorites, such as voicemail, cannot be deleted. If a favorite can’t be deleted, the

Delete button does not appear on the screen.

1 Press Phone .

3 Highlight the favorite button you want to delete.

4 Press Menu .

5 Select Edit Favorite on the Record menu.

6 Select Delete.

7 Select OK.

If you need to use your phone while driving and this is safe and permitted in your area, use a phone headset (wired headset included) or car kit (sold separately) for hands-free operation. Using a hands-free device also makes it easy to check your calendar, look up contact info, take notes, and use other features during a call.

In addition to the headset included with your Treo, your Treo is compatible with the following types of hands-free devices that are sold separately:

•

•

Wired headsets and car kits with a

2.5mm connector (3-pin or 4-pin)

Wireless headsets and car kits enabled with Bluetooth 1.1 or 1.2 wireless technology

TIP

The headset designed for Treo 180/270/

300 is not compatible with your Treo 680.

Check the specifications for your hands-free device to confirm compatibility.

64

Y O U R P H O N E 3

When in doubt, ask the manufacturer if the product is compatible with your Treo 680.

To view a list of compatible Bluetooth hands-free devices, go to www.palm.com/ treo680gsm-support.

NOTE You cannot use a hands-free device with Bluetooth wireless technology to listen to music files.

•

•

Swap between two calls (one on hold and one active)

Hang up the active call

TIP

On other headsets, the headset button may work differently than the button on the headset included with your Treo 680.

Microphone Headset button

TIP

To listen to music in stereo, you can purchase the Palm 2-in-1 Stereo Headset. If you want to use a stereo headset with a

3.5mm connector, then you need to purchase a stereo adapter. Visit www.palm.com/ treo680gsm for more info on audio accessories.

Speaker

•

•

•

Using a wired headset

When using the headset that is included with your smartphone, you can press the headset button to perform any of the following tasks:

Answer an incoming call

Answer a call-waiting call

Resume a call that you put on hold (not available when multiple calls are in progress)

65

3 Y O U R P H O N E

Connecting to a Bluetooth hands-free device

KEY TERM

Partnership Two devices—for example, your smartphone and a hands-free device—that can connect because each device finds the same passkey on the other device. Once you form a partnership with a device, you don’t need to enter a passkey to connect with that device again. Partnership is also known as paired relationship, pairing, trusted device, and trusted pair.

from another Bluetooth device. See the documentation that came with your hands-free device for instructions.

1 Press Applications and select

Bluetooth or tap the Bluetooth icon in the title bar.

2 Select Bluetooth On.

NOTE The Bluetooth icon changes from gray to blue to let you know that Bluetooth technology is turned on.

Once you set up a partnership with a

Bluetooth hands-free device, you can communicate with that device whenever it is turned on and within range. Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet in optimum environmental conditions. Performance and range may be reduced by physical obstacles, radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors.

TIP

If you hear a headset buzz or experience poor microphone performance, your headset may be incompatible with your Treo 680.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN Prepare your hands-free device to accept a connection

3 (Optional) Enter a device name that identifies your Treo 680 when it is discovered by other Bluetooth devices.

NOTE Use the same device name for all your Bluetooth connections. If you change the device name, you need to recreate any partnerships you already created.

66

Y O U R P H O N E 3

4 Select Setup Devices.

5 Select Hands-free Setup.

the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered.

6 Follow the onscreen instructions to create a partnership with the specific hands-free device. When prompted, enter a passkey.

IMPORTANT Some hands-free devices have a predefined passkey; if so, you can find the passkey in the documentation for that device. Other devices provide a screen where you enter a passkey that you make up. In either case, you must use the same passkey on both your smartphone and your hands-free device. We recommend that where possible, you make up a passkey of

16 alphanumeric characters (letters and numerals only) to improve the security of your smartphone. The longer the passkey,

7 After you finish setting up the device, select Done to return to Trusted

Devices View.

NOTE For some car kits, you need to initiate a Bluetooth connection from your smartphone to complete the partnership process. To do this, highlight the car kit in

Trusted Devices View, press Menu , and then select Connect.

8 (Optional) Enable advanced hands-free features by pressing the multifunction button (MFB) on the hands-free device.

You can tell the connection is successful when you see a light blue headset icon in the title bar of the Phone application. You can now use your Treo 680 with the

Bluetooth hands-free device.

Using a Bluetooth hands-free device

After you create a partnership with your

Bluetooth hands-free device and you turn it on within range (up to 30 feet), the Treo automatically routes all calls to the hands-free device instead of to the

67

3 Y O U R P H O N E earpiece on your Treo. When a call comes in, your smartphone rings and the hands-free device beeps. Even if you answer the call on your Treo, the call goes to the hands-free device. If you prefer to route calls to the earpiece on your Treo, you can change the settings on your

smartphone to do this; see Customizing advanced settings for your hands-free device for details.

•

•

•

•

•

Place a call on hold and answer a call-waiting call

Hang up a single call

Transfer an outgoing call from the earpiece on your Treo to the hands-free device

Ignore an incoming call

Redial the last number you called from the hands-free device

TIP

If you’re using a Bluetooth hands-free device and you want to return to the earpiece or a wired headset during a call, select Cancel

Bluetooth in Active Call View. To return the call to the hands-free device, open the

Options menu and select Connect

Bluetooth.

DID YOU KNOW ?

If you have more than one

Bluetooth hands-free device, the last one you connected to becomes the active device. To switch between devices, turn off the active device before you try to connect to the other device.

The features of your hands-free device vary by model. Check the documentation for your hands-free device for details about these features. Your Treo 680 can support the following actions, provided that your hands-free device also supports them:

•

•

Answer an incoming call

Hang up a call and answer a call-waiting call

Customizing advanced settings for your hands-free device

You can set whether your hands-free device automatically answer calls, provided the device supports this feature.


Prefs .

2 Select Hands-free.

68

Y O U R P H O N E 3

3 Do one of the following:

To send all calls to your hands-free

device: Check the Always route calls

to handsfree box. Select the Auto

answer pick list and select whether you want your hands-free device to automatically answer incoming calls and how quickly it answers.

To choose between the earpiece on

your Treo and your hands-free device

on a call-by-call basis: Uncheck the

Always route calls to handsfree box.

When the phone rings, you can answer the call with your hands-free device by pressing the multifunction button on your hands-free device, or you can answer the call with the earpiece on your Treo by using the controls on your

smartphone (see Receiving calls).

4 Select Done.

Customizing phone settings

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can download any compatible ringtone directly to your

smartphone (see Downloading files from a web page). You can also download ringtones

to your computer and then email them to your smartphone.

Selecting ringtones

You can set various tones for various types of incoming calls.

1 Press Phone .

2 Press Menu .

3 Select Options, and then select Sound

Preferences.

4 Select the Application pick list and select Ring Tones.

69

3 Y O U R P H O N E

Roaming: A special tone for incoming calls when you’re outside your home mobile network. This tone overrides all other ringtones, unless you select No

Sound.

9 Select Done.

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can assign a ringtone to a contact or an entire category of contacts.

5 Select the Volume pick list and select the volume level.

6 Select the Vibrate pick list and select when you want your smartphone to vibrate for an incoming call.

7 (Optional) Check the Escalate ring

tone volume box if you want the ring to play softly and then increase to full volume the longer it rings.

8 Select a ringtone from the pick list to identify each of the following:

Known Caller: An incoming call from someone in your Contacts or Favorites.

Unknown Caller: An incoming call from someone identified by caller ID who is not in your Contacts or Favorites. This includes callers that have blocked their caller ID.

Creating and managing ringtones

You can also record sounds and use them as ringtones.

1 Press Phone .

2 Press Menu .


Preferences.

4 Select Manage.


•

To record a sound, select New.

•

To play a sound, select it with the

5-way .

•

To delete a sound, highlight it and press Backspace .

•

To send a sound, highlight it and select Send.

70

Y O U R P H O N E 3

6 Select Done twice.

TIP

You can also create a new sound by selecting New in Sound & Alerts Preferences.

Selecting Phone alert tones

You can set various tones for various types of alerts.

1 Press Phone .

2 Press Menu .


Preferences.

4 Select the Application pick list and select Phone Alerts.

6 Select the Vibrate pick list and select when you want your smartphone to vibrate for a phone alert.

7 Select an alert tone from the pick list for each of the following:

Voicemail Alert: Plays when you have new voicemail.

Coverage in/out: Plays when you move into or out of a coverage area.

8 Select Done.

Adjusting call volume

While a call is in progress, press the

Volume button on the side of your Treo to adjust the call volume.

•

•

To increase the volume, press the upper half of the Volume button.

To decrease the volume, press the lower half of the Volume button.


71

3 Y O U R P H O N E

Volume

Side button

1 Press Phone .

2 Press Menu .


Barring.

4 Select the Outgoing and Incoming pick lists, and then select the type of calls you want to prevent.

5 Select OK.

Adjusting ringer volume

When a call is not in progress and music is not playing, press the Volume button on the side of your Treo to adjust ringer volume, and then press the Side button to confirm your selection.

Barring calls

Call Barring lets you prevent unauthorized calls on your smartphone. You must enter your Call Barring password every time you change your Call Barring preferences.

Contact your wireless service provider if you do not know this password or if you need more information.

Customizing the Main tab in the Phone application

Phone Display Options let you customize the appearance and entry mode of the

Main tab in the Phone application.

1 Press Phone .

2 Press Menu .


Display Options.


Wallpaper: Sets the wallpaper that appears on the Main tab in the Phone application. To change the wallpaper, select the thumbnail image and then select an image to use as wallpaper.

TIP

Call barring may not be available in some areas.

72

Y O U R P H O N E 3

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can also set the background for Calendar Agenda View. See

Customizing display options for your calendar

for details.

Fade: Adjusts the intensity level of the wallpaper image.

Typing…: Sets whether typing in the

Main tab in the Phone app displays the

Dial Pad and enters numbers you want to dial, or whether it displays the

Contacts tab and starts a contacts search.

TIP

If you select the Typing starts contacts

search option, you can still enter a phone number from the Main tab in the Phone app by pressing Option followed by the number.

Show Calendar event: Sets whether the current event from the Calendar application appears in the Main tab in the Phone app. When this option is enabled, you can then select this event to jump to the Calendar app.

Default View: Sets the tab that appears when you press Phone .

5 Select OK.

Setting your dialing preferences

Dialing preferences let you assign a prefix to your phone numbers. For example, you can automatically dial a 1 before all 10-digit phone numbers. You can add a different prefix based on the length of the phone number.

1 Press Phone .

2 Press Menu .

3 Select Options, and then select Dial

Preferences.


Dialing from North America: Formats phone numbers using North American conventions (XXX-XXX-XXXX).

73

3 Y O U R P H O N E

Always dial +1 in front of the area

code: Adds a 1 in front of 10-digit phone numbers. This option is available only when Dialing from North America is enabled.

To 7 digit numbers: Adds a prefix to

7-digit numbers. For example, enter your own area code to automatically add your area code when you dial local numbers.

To (6), (5), (4), digit numbers: Adds a prefix to numbers with the specified number of digits. For example, if all the phone numbers in your office have the

408 area code and a 555 exchange, followed by a 4-digit extension, select 4 and enter the prefix 408555. To call a colleague, simply dial your colleague’s

4-digit extension; your smartphone automatically dials the rest and makes the call. You can also create contact entries with just the extension number and then dial the number from your

Contacts list.

5 Select OK.

Manually selecting the wireless network

You may be able to search for other wireless network services in your current location.

1 Press Phone .

2 Press Menu .

3 Select Select Network from the

Options menu.

4 Select another network, if available.

5 Select OK.

Using TTY

A TTY (also known as TDD or text telephone) is a telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf or hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities, to communicate by telephone.

74

Y O U R P H O N E 3

Your Treo 680 is compatible with select

TTY devices. You can connect a TTY/TDD machine to your smartphone through the headset jack, but you cannot use your headset jack with a headset while this mode is enabled. Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device for connectivity information and to ensure that the TTY device supports digital wireless transmission.

To use TTY, you may need to make additional arrangements with your wireless service provider. Please contact your wireless service provider’s customer service department for more information.

1 Press Phone .

What are all those icons?

You can monitor the status of several items using icons in the title bar in the Phone application:

3 Enter #*TTY.

4 Press Send .

5 When a message appears indicating that TTY is enabled, select OK. To disable TTY, repeat these steps.

TIP

A red T appears at the top of the Phone screen to indicate that TTY is enabled.

75

3 Y O U R P H O N E

0

Your phone is on and you are in your wireless service provider’s coverage area. If you are outside a coverage area, No Service or

No Service—SOS Only appears instead. No Service means that there is no coverage at all and

No Service—SOS Only means that you can call only emergency numbers, such as

112. When you turn off your phone, Phone Off appears.

Call forwarding is active.

Your phone is on. The bars display the signal strength. The stronger the signal, the more bars that appear. If you are outside a coverage area, no bars appear.

Your phone is on and a GPRS or

EDGE network is within range, but you are not actively transmitting data. You can still make and receive calls.

Your phone is on and a GPRS or

EDGE data connection is active.

You have new voicemail messages. You can select this icon to retrieve your messages.

If you have alternate line service

(ALS), the left side is shaded when you have voicemail on line 1, and the right side is shaded when you have voicemail on line 2.

You have a new alert, such as a

Calendar alarm or a new text message. To view the alert,

select the icon. See Viewing and using the alerts.

The Bluetooth wireless technology icon appears in gray when this feature is off, in blue when this feature is on, and in reverse blue when your smartphone is communicating with another Bluetooth device.

76

This icon replaces the Bluetooth icon when your smartphone is connected to a Bluetooth hands-free device. This icon appears in dark blue when a call is in progress and in light blue when a call is not in progress.

This icon replaces the Bluetooth icon when your smartphone is connected to your computer using a dial-up networking

(DUN) connection.

Your battery is partially drained.

When the battery drains to 20% of its capacity, the icon changes from blue to red. At 10% of its capacity, you begin to receive warning messages, and at 5% of its capacity, the smartphone beeps (if the Ringer switch is in the Sound On position) and the icon changes from red to clear.

Your battery is being charged.

The lightning bolt turns from red to green when the battery is fully charged and your smartphone remains connected to the charger.

Y O U R P H O N E 3

Your battery is fully charged and your smartphone is not connected to the charger.

You have new text or multimedia messages. The number next to the icon indicates the number of unread messages in your Inbox. You can select this icon to retrieve your messages.

You have new email messages.

The number next to the icon indicates the number of unread messages in your Inbox. If you set up multiple email accounts on your smartphone, this number reflects only the account that you most recently accessed. You can select this icon to retrieve your messages.

77

3 Y O U R P H O N E

KEY TERM

GPRS (General Packet Radio

Service) A mobile connectivity technology that provides persistent data connections.

(Additional charges may apply.)

KEY TERM

EDGE (Enhanced Data rate for GSM

Evolution) An enhanced version of GPRS that delivers data speeds that are up to three times faster than standard GPRS connections.


DID YOU KNOW ?

You can tap the Bluetooth icon to quickly turn Bluetooth wireless features on and off.

TIP

To display the remaining battery power, tap the battery icon at the top of the screen.

78

Your email and other messages

You already know how efficient email and messaging are for staying in touch. Now your Palm ® Treo ™ 680 smartphone brings you a new level of convenience: email on the go. Enjoy the ease and speed of communicating with friends, family, and colleagues anywhere you can access your wireless service provider’s data network.

You can send photos to your friends and family, or create

Microsoft Word or Excel files and send them to your colleagues. You can also receive attachments to view and edit at your convenience.

Benefits

•

Access email on the go

•

Send and receive photos, sound files, Word and Excel files, and more

•

Save messages from your computer to view at a convenient time

C H A P T E R

4

In this chapter

Which email application should I use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

The VersaMail application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S 4

Which email application should I use?

The VersaMail application

Your Treo 680 includes the VersaMail application (called Email in Applications

View), which you can use to access your corporate, personal, and fee-based Internet email. You can also access web-based email, like Yahoo! Mail or Hotmail, from the web browser on your Treo.

®

TIP

An email application is not an email provider. An email application just transfers messages from an account that you have already set up with a provider.

KEY TERM

Email provider The service you use to send and receive email. Your email provider’s name appears between the @ symbol and the dot in your email address.

Before you can use VersaMail, you need to enter your email account settings. If you have multiple email accounts, you must enter settings for each email account.

After you enter your email account settings, see the User Guide for the

VersaMail Application on your computer for info on sending and receiving messages and customizing your VersaMail settings.

Windows: Start>Programs>Palm

Mac: Insert the Palm Installation CD and click the link to the User Guide for the

VersaMail Application in the

Documentation folder.

NOTE You must activate data services on your your wireless service provider account before you can use email on your smartphone.

How do I get started?

1 If either of the following is true, read the

User Guide for the VersaMail

Application on your computer:

•

You used the VersaMail application on your previous Palm OS ® device, and

81

4 Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S you want to transfer those settings to your smartphone.

•

You plan to use VersaMail to access an email account on a Microsoft

Exchange ActiveSync server, a Lotus

Notes server, or a Microsoft MAPI server.

2 If your email provider is listed in the

following table, then skip to Setting up

VersaMail to work with common providers.

Australia: Bigpond Mail and OptusNet.

Belgium: Scarlet, Skynet, Swing, and

Tiscali Belgium.

Brazil: UOL.

Canada: Rogers High Speed and

Sympatico.

Denmark: Cybercity, Sonofon, TDC, and

Tiscali.

Finland: TeliaSonera.

France: 9 Telecom, Cegetel,

Club-Internet, Free, Freesurf, La Poste,

Noos, Orange, SFR.net, Tele2, Tiscali,

Wanadoo, and yahoo!.

Germany: debitel E-Mail, E-Plus imail,

Freenet Email-Office, GMX eMail,

T-online eMail, Vodafone eMail, and

Web.de E-Mail.

Hong Kong: 1O1O, 3-DUALBAND-,

Netvigator (IMS), and One2Free.

Ireland: o2 Ireland and Vodafone

Ireland.

Italy: interfree, kataweb, libero, Tim, tin.It, and Tiscali.

Malaysia: Jaring and Maxis Net.

Mexico: Mensaje Telcel and yahoo!.

Netherlands: @Home, Chello, Het Net,

Planet Internet, Tiscali, Wanadoo,

XS4ALL, and Zonnet.

New Zealand: Vodafone NZ.

Norway: Telenor and Netcom.

Philippines: GlobeQuest and Pacific

Internet - PH.

Singapore: Pacific Internet, Singnet, and StarHub.

Spain: Movistar, Telefonica, Terra.es,

Vodafone, and Wanadoo.

82


Sweden: Bredbandsbolaget, Chello,

Com Hem, Tele2, TeliaSonera Mail,

Vodafone Euromail, and yahoo!.

Switzerland: Bluewin, GMX, green.ch,

Orange, Sunrise (my), Sunrise Freesurf,

SwissOnline, Tiscali, and yahoo!.

Taiwan: HiNet Umail.

Thailand: AIS Mail.

United Kingdom: Blueyonder, BT

Internet, BT Openworld, BT Yahoo!,

Clara.net, Demon, Freeserve, Lycos,

NTL, O2, Orange, Pipex, Tiscali, UK

Online, Virgin, Vodafone, Wanadoo, and yahoo!.

United States: AOL, Apple.Mac, AT&T

Worldnet, Bell South, Cablevision,

Charter, Comcast, CompuServe,

EarthLink, Gmail, Mail.com, NetZero,

Speakeasy, Verizon DSL, and Yahoo!.

3 If your email provider’s name is not listed, then you need to obtain the following info from your system administrator or ISP, and then skip to

Setting up VersaMail to work with other providers:

•

•

Mail protocol: POP or IMAP

Incoming and outgoing mail server names, such as mail.myisp.com

•

Incoming and outgoing mail server port numbers, such as 110 (incoming

POP), 143 (incoming IMAP), or 25

(outgoing POP or IMAP)

•

(If necessary) Security settings: APOP,

ESMTP, SSL

Setting up VersaMail to work with common providers


Email to open the VersaMail application.

2 If prompted to select an initial setup option, select Continue.

3 Make up a name that describes this account and enter it in the Account

Name field. For example, Work Email.

4 Select the Mail Service pick list, and then select your email provider, such as

EarthLink, and then select Next.

83

4 Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

5 Enter the username for your email account. Your username usually appears before the @ symbol in your email address.

NOTE For some email providers, such as

Gmail, your username is your entire email address. Check with your email provider if you are not sure what to enter as your username.

Setting up VersaMail to work with other providers


Email to open the VersaMail application.

2 If prompted to select an initial setup option, then select Continue.

3 Make up a name that describes this account and enter it in the Account

Name field. For example, Work Email.

4 Select the Mail Service pick list, and then select Other.

5 Select the Protocol pick list, select POP or IMAP (based on the info you got from your system administrator or ISP), and then select Next.

6 Select the Password box, enter your email account password, select OK, and then select Next.

7 Select Next, and then select Done.

TIP

To enter settings for another email account, open the Accounts menu and select

Account Setup.

84


6 Enter the username for your email account. Your username usually appears before the @ symbol in your email address.

NOTE For some email providers, such as

Gmail, your username is your entire email address. Check with your email provider if you are not sure what to enter as your username.

Creating and sending messages

1 From the Inbox, select New.

2 Begin entering one of the following for the addressee:

•

Email address

•

First name

•

Last name

7 Select the Password box, enter your email account password, select OK, and then select Next.

8 Enter your email address and the names of the incoming and outgoing mail servers, and then select Next.

9 If your system administrator or ISP provided port numbers or security settings, select Advanced, and then enter those settings.

TIP

If you enter address info that matches one or more of your contacts, VersaMail displays the matching contacts. To accept a suggestion, select the correct contact. To send to a different address, keep entering the email address or name.

3 Enter the subject and message text.

TIP

To move between fields, press Up or

Down on the 5-way.

TIP

You can also select Advanced to set more options for incoming and outgoing messages.

10 Select Done.

4 Select one of the following:

Send: Connects and sends all messages immediately. If the message cannot be sent for any reason, the message is stored in your Outbox.

Outbox: Puts the message in the

Outbox to send later.

85


Drafts: Saves the message so you can continue working on it at another time.

Attaching photos and videos

1 Create the message to which you want to attach the photo or video.

2 On the New Message screen, select the red paper clip icon in the upper-right corner.

3 From the Type pick list, select Photo/

Video.

DID YOU KNOW ?

VersaMail makes up to five attempts to send a message; if it is still not successful, an alert message appears and you must try to manually send the message again.

.

Adding attachments to your messages

You can attach several types of files to your email messages.

TIP

To remove an attachment, select the file in the Attachments box, and then select

Delete.

.

4 On the Select Media screen, select the

Album pick list to go to the album containing the photo or video you want, and then check the box to the left of the photo or video.

5 Select Done.

TIP

To attach more than one file to a message, repeat steps 3 and 4.

86


Attaching ringtones

1 Create the message to which you want to attach the ringtone.


3 From the Type pick list, select Sounds.

3 From the Type pick list, select

Documents.

4 Select the file you want on the

Documents screen.

5 Select Done.

TIP

Ringtones that are copy-protected appear in the Sounds application with a lock icon. You can use these ringtones on your phone, but you cannot send them as attachments.

4 Select the ringtone you want, and then select Insert.

5 Select Done.

Attaching other types of files

1 Create the message to which you want to attach the item.


3 From the Type pick list, select the type of file to attach—for example, Address,

Appointment, or Memo/Text.

4 Select the item you want from the list in the Type box.

5 Select Done.

Attaching Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and

PDF files

1 Create the message to which you want to attach the file.


Receiving and viewing messages

1 From any mailbox, select Get or Get &

Send.

2 From the Inbox, select the message you want to view.

87


3 If a large incoming message is truncated, select More .

TIP

When viewing a message, tap the scroll

arrows at the top of the screen to view the previous or next message.

4 Select Done.

Replying to or forwarding messages

When you respond to messages, you can select whether to include the original text

(see Customizing your email settings).

DID YOU KNOW ?

The VersaMail application sends all messages as plain text only, with all

HTML tags stripped, even if you are forwarding or replying to a message that was originally received as HTML.

1 From the Inbox or another folder, open the message you want to respond to.

2 In Message View, select Reply. Select whether to reply to just the sender or to reply to both the sender and all addressees on the message.

3 Enter your reply.

4 Select Send.

TIP

You can also tap the folder icon to the left of the attachment name to open a menu of tasks you can do with the attachment, including View, Install, or Unzip, depending on the attachment file type; Save to card to save the attachment to an expansion card; or select

Viewer to select the application you want to use to view the attachment.

88


Viewing attachments

There are a number of attachment types you can open with the built-in software on your smartphone (for example,

Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and

PDF files; ringtones; and photos).

TIP

You can also tap the folder icon to the left of the attachment name to open a menu of tasks you can do with the attachment, including View, Install, or Unzip, depending on the attachment file type; Save to card to save the attachment to an expansion card; or select

Viewer to select the application you want to use to view the attachment.

1 From any folder, open the message with the attachment you want to view.

Messages with downloaded attachments appear with a paper clip

icon to the left of the message icon.

3 When you finish with the attachment, select Done to return to the

Attachments dialog box.

TIP

If an attachment is not downloaded because it is larger than your maximum message size, the paper clip icon does not appear, and the attachment does not display at the bottom of the message screen. Select

More to download and display any attachments.

NOTE If there is no Done button, press

Applications and select Email to return to the account’s Inbox.

2 Tap the attachment name at the bottom of the message screen to view it in the default viewer on your smartphone.

0

Managing your messages

The status icons that appear near the messages in your Inbox indicate the following:

The message is unread when the subject appears in bold.

The message includes an attachment.

89


The message includes a meeting invitation.

This message has high priority.

2 Press Menu .

3 Select Delete on the Message menu.

4 If a confirmation dialog box appears, select OK to confirm deletion.

You can rearrange the message list to make it easier to find and view messages.

•

•

In the Inbox, select Sort, and then select one of the following: Sort by

Date, Sort by Name, Sort by Subject.

To quickly switch between folders in list view, select the folder pick list at the top of the screen and select the desired folder.

Deleting selected messages from the

Inbox

When you delete a message from the

Inbox, it moves to the Trash folder.

1 Select the bullet next to the icon of each message that you want to delete. To select adjacent messages, drag the stylus so it touches the bullet to the left of each message. Lift the stylus and drag again to select more adjacent messages.

TIP

To delete a single message, select the

envelope icon next to the message, and then select Delete from the list.

Deleting messages by date

You can quickly delete a group of messages by selecting a range of dates.

1 Press Menu .

2 Select Delete Old on the Message menu.

3 Select the folder and a date range for the messages you want to delete.

4 Select OK.

5 If a confirmation dialog box appears, select OK to confirm deletion.

TIP

To empty (or purge) the Trash folder, open the Message menu and select Empty Trash.

90


Switching accounts

If you create more than one email account in VersaMail, you need to switch from account to account to get, send, and otherwise manage the messages in each account.

1 Press Menu .

2 Select Accounts, and then select an account.

and more. For complete information on all of the email settings you can customize, see the User Guide for the VersaMail

Application on your computer.





DID YOU KNOW ?

If you assigned VersaMail to a quick button, you can press that button repeatedly to switch between your different email accounts.

Scheduling Auto Sync

You can set up VersaMail to automatically download new email messages to your smartphone with the Auto Sync feature.

Customizing your email settings

You can customize the VersaMail settings for each individual email account on your

Treo. The preferences you set apply only to the email account you are currently viewing. If you have multiple accounts, configure each account separately.

You can set up a schedule to automatically retrieve email messages; set preferences for how and when messages are retrieved; add a signature to an outgoing message;

TIP

You need to set up a separate Auto Sync schedule for each email account. This feature may not work with email accounts that require

VPN connection.

1 Press Menu .


Preferences.

91


3 Select Auto Sync.

TIP

After you set up a scheduled Auto Sync and select Get Mail, from then on, only new messages are retrieved during Auto Sync.

4 Check the Auto-sync box.

5 Select the Every pick list and select the time interval, from 5 minutes to

12 hours.

NOTE If you set a more frequent interval, you may need to recharge your Treo battery more often.

Selecting alert tones

When you schedule Auto Sync for a given account, you can choose a sound—such as a bird, a phone, or an alarm—to let you know when new email arrives.

1 From any mailbox screen, press

Menu .


Preferences.

3 Select Alerts.

4 Check the Alert me of new mail box.

6 Select the Start Time and End Time boxes, and then select the hour, the minute, and AM or PM to enter the time for the first and last Auto Sync to take place. Select OK.

7 Select the days you want the schedule to be active. You can choose any number of days, but you can set up only one schedule for each email account.

8 Select OK, and then select Get Mail.

TIP

To receive notifications of successful Auto

Sync retrievals only, uncheck the Alert me of

auto sync failures box. Leave the box checked if you want to receive notifications of both successful and failed Auto Sync retrievals.

5 Select the Alert Sound pick list, and then select a sound. Your Treo plays a brief demo of the sound.

6 Select OK.

92


Setting preferences for getting messages


Menu .


Preferences.

3 Select Incoming.

Unread messages (IMAP accounts

only): Downloads only unread mail to your smartphone. If you don’t check this box and you select Get & Send, all the messages on your mail server are downloaded to your Inbox, including messages you’ve read.

4 Set any of the following preferences, and then select OK.

Get: Indicates whether to get message subjects only or entire messages.

Ask Every Time: Indicates if you want to see a dialog box for selecting subjects only or entire messages each time you retrieve email. If the box is unchecked, messages are retrieved according to the option you select in the

Get pick list.

TIP

The POP protocol does not support retrieval of unread mail only from the server. If you have a POP email account, VersaMail downloads all messages regardless of whether you have read them, and regardless of whether the Unread messages box is checked.

Mail from last: Gets messages sent within the number of days you specify.

Download attachments: Automatically downloads files attached to email, except for attachments that exceed the maximum message size.

Maximum message size: Sets the maximum size of an incoming email message. Enter the size in kilobytes

(KB). The default is 5KB, but you can enter any size up to 2048KB

[approximately 2 megabytes (MB)],

93

4 Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S including attachments. The maximum message size that you can retrieve is

60KB for the body text and approximately 5MB of total data for any attachments.

Message Format: Sets the format for messages you retrieve.

•

HTML: Displays messages sent in

HTML format with basic formatting intact and displays other messages as plain text.

•

Text: Displays all messages as plain text, regardless of the format in which they were sent.

Attaching a signature to a message

You can attach a personal signature, with info like your company’s address and phone numbers, to the bottom of all messages you send.


Menu .


Preferences.

3 Select Signature.

4 Check the Attach Signature box.

5 Enter your signature information, and then select OK.

Working with Microsoft Exchange

ActiveSync

Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync works with the VersaMail, Calendar, and Contacts apps on your smartphone to directly access corporate groupware information on a

Microsoft Exchange 2003 server. You can synchronize business email, calendar, and contact info with the Exchange 2003 server from your smartphone without using a desktop computer.

When you create a Microsoft Exchange

ActiveSync account in the VersaMail application, your email, calendar, and contact info sync directly with the

Exchange Server; information does not sync with the desktop software application on your computer, such as Microsoft

Outlook or Palm Desktop software. Other information that is stored on your computer, such as tasks and memos, continues to synchronize with your desktop software.

94


For complete info on using a Microsoft

Exchange ActiveSync account, see the

User Guide for the VersaMail Application on your computer.

Windows: Start > Programs > Palm




Creating and sending a text message

Each text message can have up to

160 characters. Messages with more than

160 characters are automatically split into several messages. (If you send a text message to an email address, the email address is deducted from the

160-character count.)

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can page someone to call you by sending them a blank text message.

Messaging

You can use the Messaging application to exchange brief text messages (SMS) and multimedia messages (MMS) with other devices and email addresses that support these forms of messaging. Before you use your Treo to send or receive messages, refer to your service plan for pricing and availability of messaging services.

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can address messages to multiple recipients by separating the addresses with a comma. If you address a single message to three people, you will be billed for three messages.

1 Press Messaging .

2 Select New.

3 Select the To field to address the message:

•

Press Center . If the recipient’s name appears in the list of recent addresses, select it from the list.

•

If the recipient is in your Contacts list, enter the first initial and last name (no spaces), and then select the recipient’s phone number or email address, depending on where you want to send the message.

95


•

If the recipient’s name isn’t in the list of recent addresses or your Contacts list, enter the phone number or email address.

TIP

If you see numbers when you expect to see letters (or the other way around), you need to turn Option Lock on by pressing

Option twice or turn it off by pressing Option once.

5 Select Send.

NOTE phones may not be supported.

4 Enter your message or select

QuickText to insert predefined phrases. To insert emoticons, select .

TIP

To add a new QuickText phrase, select

Edit QuickText from the list.

NOTE

Sending text messages to land line

Some symbols can’t be used in text messages. The Messaging application automatically replaces invalid characters.

TIP

Select Save as Draft to save a draft of the message without sending it. To access the draft, select the category pick list at the top of the screen and select Drafts.

Creating and sending a multimedia message

KEY TERM

Slide A collection of text, pictures, videos, and sounds that are grouped together within a multimedia message. During playback, all the items within a particular slide appear on the same screen. If a multimedia message contains multiple slides, each slide can be viewed separately during playback.

96


0

Multimedia messages consist of text, photos, videos, and sounds presented as one or more slides.You can include any of the following items:

Item

Pictures

Videos

Supported File Types

JPEG, GIF, WBMP

MPEG4, 3GGP, 3GPP2

Ringtones MIDI

Sound clips AMR, QCELP


2 Select New.

3 Select Add Media.

4 Select the To field to address the message with up to 25 addresses:

•

Press Center . If the recipient’s name appears in the list of recent addresses, select it from the list.

•

If the recipient is in your Contacts list, enter the first initial and last name (no spaces), and then select the recipient’s phone number or email address.

•

If the recipient’s name is not in the list of recent addresses or your Contacts list, enter the phone number or email address.

5 Enter a subject.

6 Select the image placeholder, and then select one of the following:

Attach image: Insert one photo or video from your smartphone or an expansion card.

Take new picture: Take a picture with the built-in camera and add it to the message.

Take new video: Capture a short video with the built-in camcorder and add it to the message.

97


TIP

When creating a message, you can preview or delete an item. Highlight the item, press Center on the 5-way, and then select

Remove, View, or Play.

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can send a contact or calendar entry. Select the entry, open the

Record menu, select Send, and then select

Messaging.

7 (Optional) Select Sound , and then select one of the following:

Record new: Record a sound clip of up to 1 minute.

Attach voice memo: Select a memo you recorded in the Voice Memo application.

Attach ringtone: Select a ringtone.

8 Enter a text message or caption.

9 Select Add slide to insert additional slides.

10 (Optional) Select Preview to view the message as the recipient will see it.

11 (Optional) Press Menu , and then select High Priority from the Compose menu to mark the message as urgent.

12 Select Send.

Receiving messages

When your phone is turned on and is in an area of wireless coverage, you automatically receive new text messages.

For multimedia messages, you can set your smartphone to automatically download new messages or to notify you that a message is ready to be downloaded

(see Customizing your Messaging settings). You can also configure how your

smartphone notifies you when a new

message arrives (see Selecting Messaging alert tones).

The new message alert may include any of the following buttons:

•

•

OK: Dismisses the alert and places the message in your Inbox.

Reply: Opens Chat View, where you can reply with a text message. To send an MMS reply, select Add from Chat

View.

98


•

•

•

Call Back: Dials the sender’s phone number.

Go To Msg: Opens the message so you can view its full contents.

Delete: Moves the message from your

Inbox to the Deleted folder.

Using links in messages

When you receive a text message that contains a telephone number, email address, or URL, you can dial the number, send an email message, or go to the web page immediately.


2 Select the message that contains the link you want to use.

3 Select the phone number, email address, or URL (appears as underlined blue text).

Your Treo automatically launches the appropriate application from the link.

TIP

When you receive a message, you can also press Send to call the sender.

TIP

If you have multiple alerts, the Alert dialog box displays all your pending alerts. Select an item’s description to jump to that item, or check the box to clear that item. To view all your pending alerts from any screen on your smartphone, press and hold Center on the

5-way.

Viewing/playing a multimedia message


2 Select the message you want to view.

3 If there are sounds or multiple slides, playback begins immediately.


•

Use the onscreen controls to scroll to other slides and messages.

99


•

To view message details, press Menu

and select Message Details from the Message menu.

•

To save a calendar or contact entry, open the message details. You can access saved entries later by pressing

Applications and selecting

(depending on the type of entry you saved).

5 Select OK.

• select Save Sound from the

Message menu. You can access saved sounds later by pressing


Sounds or Voice Memo .

•

To save a picture, press Menu , and select Save Picture from the

Message menu. You can access saved pictures later by pressing


Pics&Videos .

Arranging your messages

You can rearrange the messages in any folder by using the Sort command.


•

To copy the text, use the stylus to highlight the text, then press Menu

, select Edit, and then select

Copy.

•

To stop playback of a message, select

Play/Stop.

2 Select the folder list in the title bar and select the folder you want to sort.

100


3 Press Menu .

4 Select View, and then select Sort by

Name or Sort by Date.

Deleting messages

You can delete several messages at once from any folder by using the Purge command.

TIP

To delete an individual message, highlight it in the message list, and then select Delete.


2 Select the folder list in the title bar and select the folder that contains the messages you want to delete.

3 Press Menu .

4 Select Purge from the Message menu.

5 Select the Purge pick list, and then select an option.

6 Select OK.

Chatting with Messaging

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can send and receive text messages even while you are on a phone call.

This is easiest when using a hands-free device or the speakerphone.

When you exchange more than one message with a single contact, the messages you exchange with that person are grouped into a chat session. When you select a chat session from your message list, the upper part of Chat View displays all messages you’ve exchanged with this contact, and the lower part provides an entry area.

You can carry on multiple chats at the same time and easily switch between them, using the pick list at the top of the screen.

TIP

To find a chat you had with someone, open your Messaging Inbox and select a chat session.



Start a new chat: Select a message and reply to it.

101


Continue an existing chat: Select a message that displays the Chat icon.

102

3 Enter your message.

TIP

Pale gray text indicates that a message is pending or enroute.

4 Select Send.

Customizing your Messaging settings


2 Press Menu .

3 From the Options menu, select

Preferences.

4 On the Messages tab, set any of the following preferences for your individual messages:

Create new messages as: Indicates whether text or multimedia messaging is the default format for a new message.

Request Receipts (MMS only):

Indicates whether you want to receive a confirmation when an outgoing MMS message is delivered.

NOTE If your wireless service provider supports delivery receipts for text messages, an additional setting appears here.

Confirm message deletions: Indicates whether you want deletion confirmation prompts to appear.

Privacy Mode (hide text): Indicates whether you want the body text to

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S 4 appear in the alert when you receive a new message, or whether you want the alert to hide the text and prompt you to go to the message.

Message validity period: Indicates how long you want an outgoing message to be valid.

5 Select the Chat tab and set any of the following preferences for chat sessions.

Display my name in chat window as:

Enter the name you want to use as the label for your messages in Chat View.

Label color: Select a color to differentiate your messages from the sender’s messages while in Chat View.

Use color for: Indicate whether you want both your name and message text in the selected label color, or only your name.

6 Select the Network tab and set any of the following preferences for network connections.

Create chats from messages: Indicate when you want to group messages from the same person into a chat.

Show timestamps in chats: Indicate whether you want to see the local date and time the message was sent next to each message.

Automatically collect MMS

messages: Indicate whether you want to download multimedia messages automatically.

103


Even when roaming: Indicate whether you want to automatically receive multimedia messages while roaming.

Network Configuration: Indicate if you want to use Automatic or Manual message retrieval. If you select Manual, select Edit and enter your wireless service provider’s settings.

NOTE We recommend that you do not change the Network Configuration settings.

7 Select OK.

Selecting Messaging alert tones

DID YOU KNOW ?

Your Treo includes a silent alert that can vibrate even when the Ringer switch is set to Sound Off.

1 Press Messaging

2 Press Menu .

.

3 Select Options, and then select Alerts.

4 Select the Application pick list and select Messaging.


6 Select the Vibrate pick list and select when you want your smartphone to vibrate.

7 Select the Message Tone pick list and select a tone for incoming message alerts for a message alert.

8 Check the boxes if you want to see onscreen alerts when a new message arrives and when a message you sent is received.

9 Select Done.

104


What are all those icons?

TIP

By default, the Messaging app shows the

Inbox folder. To view a different folder, select the folder list in the title bar and select a different folder from the list.

The message descriptions in the Inbox,

Outbox, and Sent folders show the message status:

•

•

Unread messages appear in bold.

Read messages appear in plain text.

•

Urgent messages appear with a red exclamation point (!).

The following icons show the message type and additional status info:

A text message

A chat session

A multimedia message that is ready for you to download

A multimedia message that is fully downloaded

A multimedia message that is fully downloaded and contains sound

A voicemail page

A message that is waiting to be sent

A receipt, which you requested, confirming delivery of the message

An outgoing message with an error

DID YOU KNOW ?

If you are outside a coverage area or if your phone is turned off, outgoing messages go into the Outbox. When you return to a coverage area or turn your phone on, your pending messages are automatically sent and transferred to the Sent folder.

105


106

Your connections to the web and wireless devices

You use the web for many things: driving directions, shopping, news, web-based email. Now, with your wireless service provider network and the built-in web browser, you can take the web with you almost anywhere.

The built-in Bluetooth ® feature of your Palm ® Treo ™ 680 smartphone helps you easily set up wireless connections to a number of devices, so you can enjoy the convenience of cable-free connectivity. You can also use your smartphone to connect your computer to the Internet and to share contacts or your favorite photos with other people.

Benefits

•

Carry the web with you

•

Store web pages for offline viewing

•

•

Connect to Bluetooth headsets and car kits

Connect your computer to the

Internet through your smartphone

C H A P T E R

5

In this chapter

Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Connecting your computer to the Internet through your Treo . . . . . 118

Connections with Bluetooth devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S 5

Web browser

The Blazer

®

web browser on your Treo provides quick and easy access to web pages. You can view most sites you use on your computer, including those with security and advanced features, such as

JavaScript and frames. To browse the web, you must activate data services from your wireless service provider. content without scrolling left or right. You can also switch to Wide Page Mode if you like.

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can send email from a web page on your Treo. Email addresses appear as links on web pages. After you configure an email application on your Treo, you can select an email address link to create a message to the selected address.

Optimized Mode

DID YOU KNOW ?

The security certificates and

128-bit Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption let you visit secure websites, like ones for banking and using email. Some secure sites also require specific browsers, so those may not work with your web browser.

DID YOU KNOW ?

The web browser supports

JavaScript, SSL strong encryption, and cookies, but does not support plug-ins (such as Flash or Shockwave) or Java applets.

Wide Page Mode

Viewing a web page

To make viewing web pages on your Treo a better experience, the web browser reformats web pages into a single column and resizes images. In this format—called

Optimized Mode—you can see most

109

5 Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S

1 Press Applications and select Web

to open the Blazer web browser. If necessary, select Yes to turn on your phone, and Yes to connect to the

Internet.

If you do not see either of these icons

in the title bar, data services are not available in your current location and you cannot connect to the Internet.

2 Enter a web page address (URL) in the

Address Bar and select Go.

NOTE If you browse to a secure web page, a lock icon appears in the

Address Bar.

Follow a link to another web page: In

Optimized Mode, highlight the link by press Center to go to the selected page. In Wide Page Mode, use the stylus to select a link.

Submit a form: Enter the info and then select the onscreen button to submit the form. If the form doesn’t have an onscreen button, press Return .

TIP

To adjust the font size, open the Options menu and select Font. To fit more text on the screen, select Small. To make the text easier to read, select Large.

3 Do any of the following to navigate within the web page:

View a page in wide layout format (as on your computer): Press Menu , select Options, and then select Wide

Page Mode.

Scroll through the page: In Optimized

Mode (the default format) press Up any direction.

or Down . In Wide Page Mode, use all buttons on the 5-way to scroll in

0

4 Use the 5-way to access any of the following icons in the title bar:

Goes to your home page.

Opens a dialog box where you can enter a web address or view a list of recently viewed web pages.

Goes back in order through pages you viewed.

Goes forward in order through pages you viewed.

110


Gets the latest version of the current web page. This is sometimes called refreshing the web page.

Opens a list where you can select Fast mode (no images or style sheets) or Normal mode

(with images and style sheets).

4 Change the entries in the Name and

Description fields.


Creating a bookmark

With bookmarks, you can instantly access a web page without entering the address every time. The web browser can store up to 100 bookmarks or saved pages, allowing you to open your favorite web pages quickly. Note that a bookmark is different from a saved page and different from a

favorite (see Defining favorite buttons).

DID YOU KNOW ?

The predefined bookmarks take you to pages that are optimized for your

Treo.

Saving a page

You can use the web browser to save a page for offline viewing, so you don’t need a wireless connection to view it later.

1 Go to the page you want to save.

2 Press Menu .

3 Select Save Page from the Page menu.


1 Go to the page you want to bookmark.

2 Press Menu .

3 Select Add Bookmark from the Page menu.

Viewing bookmarks or saved pages

Bookmarks and saved pages both appear in

Bookmarks View. Saved pages are indicated by a small triangle in the upper-right corner of the bookmark.

111


DID YOU KNOW ?

You can make Bookmarks

View the default view when you open the browser. Open the Options menu and select

Preferences. Select the Start With pick list and select Bookmarks.

Editing or deleting a bookmark or saved page

1 In Bookmarks View, press Menu .

2 Select Edit Bookmarks from the

Bookmarks menu.

3 Select the bookmark you want to edit or delete.

TIP

If you can’t edit, delete, or beam a bookmark, it is probably locked and these actions are prohibited.

4 Enter the desired changes or select

Delete.

5 Select OK.

2 Select the bookmark or saved page you want to view.

TIP

To go back to the last web page you viewed without selecting a bookmark, select

Page View.

Arranging bookmarks and saved pages

Bookmarks View has ten pages where you can store and arrange bookmarks and saved pages in a way that works for you.

For example, you can store travel links on one bookmark page, stock links on another, and business links on a third page.

112


1 In Bookmarks View, press Menu .

2 Select Edit Bookmarks from the

Bookmarks menu.

3 Enter a title for this page of bookmarks.

4 Use the stylus to drag and drop a bookmark into the desired slot. You can move a bookmark within the current page or move it to a different bookmark page by dragging and dropping it on one of the Bookmark Page icons at the bottom of the screen.

5 Select OK. example, if you download an MP3 file, you can listen to it later in the Pocket Tunes™ application. If a file is not recognized by any application on your Treo 680 you cannot open it on your Treo. You can, however, download the file to an expansion card, transfer it to your computer using an expansion card reader (sold separately), and view it on your computer.

You can download files such as new applications and choose to play or save music and video files in many popular formats—provided that the website permits the downloading of files:

Item

Pictures

Videos

Ringtones

Music

Supported File Types

JPEG, WBMP, GIF, animated GIF

MP4, 3G2, ASF, WMV

MIDI, AAC

MP3, WMA

Downloading files from a web page

The web browser lets you download files that are recognized by one of the applications on your Treo 680. When you download a file, you can open it in the application that recognizes the file. For

TIP

You can also access software and other downloads using the Downloads bookmark.

113


1 Go to the page with the link to the file you want to download.


•

Right to highlight the link to the file, and then press Center .

•

In Wide Page Mode, tap the link with your stylus.

3 If prompted, select what you want to do with the file: Play, Save To Device, or

Save To Card.

4 Select Yes.

TIP

You can also save an image from a web page by tapping and holding it with the stylus.

Streaming files from a web page

The web browser lets you stream files that are recognized by one of the applications on your Treo 680. For example, you can choose to play music and video files in many popular formats (MP3, WMA, WMV).

1 When the web browser recognizes streamed content on a web page, it displays a Play icon. To view or listen to the streamed content, select

Play .

TIP

The web browser recognizes streamed content that is not supported by any of the applications on your Treo 680, and it displays a

Media type not supported message.

2 Once streaming begins, playback starts automatically. Use the following controls when viewing or listening:

•

Select to return to the web page containing the streamed content.

•

Select or press Center pause playback.

•

Select or press Center resume playback after pausing.

•

A few seconds after playback begins, the toolbar is hidden and you can view the content on the full screen. Press

Up Down to display the toolbar; press Up Down again to hide the toolbar again.

•

Press the Volume button on the side of your smartphone to adjust the volume.

Copying text from a web page

You can copy text from a web page and paste it into other applications.

114


1 Use the stylus to highlight the text you want to copy.

2 Press Menu .

3 Select Edit, and then select Copy.

4 Go to the app in which you want to paste the text and position the cursor where you want to paste the text.

5 Press Menu .

6 Select Edit, and then select Paste.

DID YOU KNOW ?

If the web browser does not recognize a phone number as dialable, you can copy the phone number (as text) and

paste it into the Dial Pad (see Dialing from a web page or message).

2 Select Find Text on Page from the

Page menu.

3 Enter the text you want to find.

4 Check or uncheck the Wrap Search box to indicate whether you want the search to wrap from the end of the page to the beginning when the end is reached.

5 Select Find to start the search.

Customizing your web browser settings

1 In Page View, press Menu .


Preferences.

3 Select Page and set any of the following preferences:

Returning to recently viewed pages

The History list stores the addresses of the last 100 pages you visited. Items in the

History list are sorted chronologically.


2 Select History from the Page menu.

3 Select the web page you want to load.

Finding text on a web page


Start With: Determines which view appears when you open the browser.

115


Home Page: Sets the page that appears when you select .

Restore Default: Selects the original home page, if you changed it.

Show Address Bar: Sets whether the web address appears in Page View.

When it is visible, you can select the pick list to go to a previously viewed page or enter a URL directly from Page

View.

4 Select General and set any of the following preferences:

Auto-complete: Determines whether the web browser suggests text, based on your previous entries, when you begin entering info.

Disable cookies: Determines whether websites can store personalized info on your Treo. Some sites do not work properly if you select this option.

Disable JavaScript: Bypasses

JavaScript elements on the web pages you view.

Tap and Drag: Determines whether dragging the stylus selects text or scrolls through the content of the page.

Normal mode/Fast mode: Determines whether a web page appears as designed (Normal mode) or with some of the items removed for faster display.

Selecting Fast mode gives you the following options:

•

Disable cascading style sheets:

Determines whether style sheets are applied when you load a web page.

When style sheets are disabled, pages download faster, but you may lose some of the formatting.

KEY TERM

Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) A file that governs design elements of a web page, such as its fonts, colors, and layout.

116


•

Don’t download images!

Determines whether images appear when you load a web page. If you select not to view images, you can still see any image by selecting the placeholder box on the web page.

TIP

Lots of pretty graphics slowing you down?

Browse the web faster by enabling the Don’t download images! option.

5 Select Advanced and set any of the following preferences:

Cookies: Indicates how much memory is being used by cookies. To free up this memory, select Clear Cookies.

Cache: Indicates how much memory is being used by your cache to store recent pages and history. To free up this memory, select Clear Cache.

Clear cache on exit: Determines whether the cache clears each time you exit the web browser.

Set Proxy: Sets up a proxy server to access the Internet. If your connection requires a proxy server, please contact your Internet service provider or IT administrator for this information.

6 Select OK.

Set memory limit for storing pages:

Sets the amount of memory used for your cache. Pages are cached so that they load faster the next time you view them.

117


Connecting your computer to the

Internet through your Treo

Dial-up networking (DUN) is the feature that converts your smartphone into a modem so that you can access the Internet from your computer. If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, you can set up your smartphone as a wireless modem using the built-in Bluetooth technology.

The following procedures describe the process of setting up your smartphone as a wireless modem using the built-in

Bluetooth technology.

Creating a partnership between your Treo and your computer

1 Make sure that your computer’s

Bluetooth setting is on and that your computer is ready to create a Bluetooth partnership. Check the documentation that came with your computer to find and change these settings.

2 On your smartphone, press

Applications and select

Bluetooth .

3 Select Bluetooth On if it is not already selected, and then select Setup

Devices.

4 Select Trusted Devices.

TIP

If your computer is not enabled with

Bluetooth wireless technology, you need to purchase a wireless Bluetooth adapter accessory for your computer to use this feature.

5 Select Add Device. The discovery icon appears, indicating that the discovery process is active.

118


6 Select your computer from the Trusted

Devices list, and then select OK.

7 Make up a passkey, enter it on the

Bluetooth Security screen, and then select OK. The passkey can be up to 16 numbers.

NOTE You need this passkey in the next step, so be sure to write it down exactly.

We recommend that you use a passkey of

16 numbers, where possible, to improve the security of your Treo. The longer the passkey, the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered.

Accessing the Internet using a Bluetooth

DUN connection

The steps for accessing the Internet on your computer may vary depending on your operating system and how Bluetooth wireless technology is set up on your computer—for example, if it is built-in versus if you are using a Bluetooth adapter.

If you need additional info, check your computer’s documentation for how to set up Bluetooth technology to access the

Internet using a DUN connection.

8 Enter the same passkey on your computer when prompted.

9 Select Done, and then select Done again to return to the Bluetooth screen.

TIP

You may need to use a virtual private network (VPN) to access corporate email.

Check with your system administrator for more information.

Setting up your computer for a Bluetooth

DUN connection

Follow the instructions from the manufacturer of your Bluetooth adapter to enable DUN.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN Verify that DUN is enabled on your computer. See the documentation that came with your computer for details.

1 Open the Bluetooth application on your computer and let it locate the Treo you paired it with in the previous procedure.

119


2 Double-click the icon or option representing your smartphone. Your computer connects to your smartphone and shows that DUN services are available.

3 Double-click the DUN icon.

4 Enter your wireless service provider’s settings. Contact your wireless service provider if you don’t have these settings.

5 Click Dial. Once the connection is successfully established, you can browse the Internet on your computer or download your email.

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can check the status of the connection by right-clicking the Bluetooth

network icon in the taskbar.

NOTE When a DUN connection is active, you cannot use data services on your smartphone. For example, you cannot browse the Web, or send or receive email messages. Also, any scheduled automatic email retrievals do not take place. You can, however, use other wireless features of your smartphone, such as making and receiving phone calls or sending and receiving text messages.

TIP

If you get a message asking whether you want your computer to remember the dial text for this connection, we recommend that you say yes. This avoids errors and the inconvenience of entering the dial text for every session.

6 Look for a network connection icon in the taskbar at the bottom of your computer screen to verify that you are connected.

Terminating a Bluetooth DUN Internet session

It is important to end a Bluetooth DUN session after you finish using it. Ending the

DUN session lets you use the wireless features of your Treo 680 that require a data connection, it frees up the Bluetooth feature so that you can connect to other

Bluetooth devices, and it optimizes battery life, too.

120


1 On your computer, right-click the icon or option representing your smartphone.

2 Click Disconnect.

Connections with

Bluetooth devices

With the built-in Bluetooth wireless technology on your Treo, you can connect to a number of Bluetooth devices, including a hands-free device such as a headset or car kit, a printer, or a GPS receiver, as well as to other smartphones and handhelds that are equipped with

Bluetooth wireless technology. If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, you can also synchronize wirelessly or use your phone to connect your computer to the Internet.

You can create a list of Bluetooth devices that you trust to communicate with your

Treo. When communicating with trusted devices, your Treo skips the discovery process and creates a secure link as long as the device is within range. Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet depending on environmental conditions, including obstacles, radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors.

When you configure a hands-free device,

as described previously in Connecting to a

Bluetooth hands-free device, the

hands-free device automatically appears in your Trusted Devices list. Follow the steps in this section to add other devices to your

Trusted Devices list, such as a friend’s handheld.

DID YOU KNOW ?

Your Treo does not support wireless connections to Bluetooth stereo headphones.

121


Requesting a connection with another

Bluetooth device


Bluetooth .


5 Select Trusted Devices.



4 Select Setup Devices.

6 Select Add Device. The Discovery icon appears, indicating that the discovery process is active.

7 Select the Show pick list and select

Nearby devices.

8 If the device you want to add doesn’t appear on the Discovery Results list, make sure that the other device is ready to receive a connection request (see the device’s documentation), and then select Find More on your Treo to search again.

9 Enter the same passkey on your smartphone and on the Bluetooth device, and select OK.

122


IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices have a preset passkey; if so, you can find the passkey in the documentation for that device. Other devices provide a screen where you enter a passkey that you make up. In either case, you must use the same passkey on both your smartphone and the other Bluetooth device. We recommend that where possible, you make up a passkey of 16 alphanumeric characters

(letters and numerals only) to improve the security of your Treo. The longer the passkey, the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered.

10 Select Done.

Accepting a connection from another

Bluetooth device




TIP

For the smartphone to be visible to

Bluetooth devices, the Bluetooth setting must be set to On and visibility must be set to

Visible or Temporary.

1 Press Applications

Bluetooth .

and select

4 Select the Visibility pick list and select one of the following:

Visible: Enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Devices list to request a connection with your smartphone. Your smartphone remains accessible to other devices until you turn this option off. After you’re done using this setting, remember to change it back to Hidden.

123


TIP

Use the Visible option only when you need your smartphone to be accessible for an extended period of time. For short term accessibility, use the Temporary option.

Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Devices list to request a connection with your smartphone during the next two minutes. Your smartphone reverts to the Hidden setting and becomes inaccessible to other devices after two minutes.

Hidden: Allows only devices with which you have previously formed a partnership to request a connection with your smartphone. New devices cannot request a connection.

5 Enter the same passkey on your smartphone and on the Bluetooth device.

IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices, such as headsets and GPS receivers, have a preset passkey; if so, you can find the passkey in the documentation for that device. Other devices provide a screen where you enter a passkey that you make up. In either case, you must use the same passkey on both your Treo and the other

Bluetooth device. We recommend that where possible, you make up a passkey of

16 alphanumeric characters (letters and numerals only) to improve the security of your Treo. The longer the passkey, the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered.

6 (Optional) Check the Add to trusted

device list box if you want to form a partnership with the requesting device.

7 Select OK.

124

Your photos, videos, and music

Do you have a wallet bulging with photos of friends, family, pets, and your most recent vacation?

Are you tired of carrying both your MP3 player and your phone?

Your Palm ® Treo ™ 680 smartphone solves both problems. You can keep your favorite photos right on your Treo—videos, too. And there's no need to carry an expensive MP3 player; you can play music on your Treo. Simply transfer songs onto your Treo or an expansion card and then listen through your stereo headphones

(cards and headphones sold separately).

Benefits

•

Never be far from your favorite people, places, and songs

•

Arrange your photos, videos, and songs

•

No separate photo viewer, MP3,

CD, or mini-disc player required

C H A P T E R

6

In this chapter

Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Pictures & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Pocket Tunes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C 6

Camera

New Albums: Opens a dialog box where you can enter an album name and select the storage location

(smartphone or expansion card).

Your Treo 680 comes with an easy-to-use, built-in, VGA camera with 2x digital zoom.

You can use the camera to take and view pictures and videos and send them to your friends and family. To add a personal touch to your Treo, use your pictures as your wallpaper for the Main tab in the Phone application and as caller ID images.

Taking a picture

You can store pictures on your smartphone or on an expansion card.


Camera .

2 By default, the Camera application stores pictures you take in the PALM folder on your expansion card (if a card is inserted). Otherwise, Camera stores pictures in the PALM album on your

Treo. To store a picture in a different location, select one of the following:

<Album name>: Stores the picture in the selected album. The storage location is based on the location of the album (smartphone or expansion card).

TIP

The default camera resolution is VGA (640 x 480) and it also supports QVGA (320 x 240) resolution. To view these settings before you take a picture, press Menu.

3 Find your subject in the screen on your

Treo (the lens is on the back of your

Treo).

4 (Optional) To get a close-up of your subject, press Up 2x. Press

Down to return to 1x.

5 Press Center to capture the picture.

127

6 Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C


TIP

To add an audio caption later, open the picture and then select Audio Caption from the Photo menu.

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can personalize a picture.

Open the Photo menu, select Draw on, and then use the drawing tools to add your own personal touch. When you save the picture, you can replace the original or save a copy.

Saves the picture in the location you selected in step 2.

Deletes the picture.

Opens a dialog box where you can select how you want to send the picture: Messaging,

Bluetooth, or Email. The receiving device must support the method you select.

Lets you add a voice caption.

Recording a video

You can store videos on your smartphone or on an expansion card.


Camera .

2 Select Camcorder .

TIP

The video recording screen displays the approximate recording time you have left based on the space available on your smartphone or expansion card. Actual recording time may vary depending on how fast you are moving, how many colors you are recording, and so on.

3 By default, the Camera application stores videos you record in the PALM folder on your expansion card (if a card is inserted). Otherwise, Camera stores

128

Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C 6 pictures in the PALM album on your

Treo. To store a video in a different location, select one of the following:

<Album name>: Stores the video in the selected album. The storage location is based on the location of the album


New Albums: Opens a dialog box where you can enter an album name and select the storage location


4 Find your subject in the screen on your

Treo (the lens is on the back of your

Treo).

5 Press Center to start recording.

6 After you finish recording, press

Center again to stop.

7 Select any of the following:

TIP

The default camcorder resolution is CIF

(352 x 288) and it also supports QCIF (176 x

144). To view these settings before you capture a video, press Menu.

Plays the video, so you can review it.

Saves the video in the location you selected in step 2.

Deletes the video.

129


Opens a dialog box where you can select how you want to send the video: Messaging, Bluetooth, or Email. The receiving device must support the method you select and video messages.

Opens a dialog box where you can adjust the volume during playback.

3 Set any of the following preferences:

Effects: Sets the color palette for the current picture or video. You cannot change an item’s palette after you take the picture or video.

Prompt sound: (Pictures only) Sets the sound that plays before you take the picture.

Shutter sound: Determines whether a sound plays when you take a picture.

TIP

During playback, tap and drag the

progress indicator bar to jump to a different section of the video. Select Pause to pause video playback.

Microphone: (Videos only) Turns the microphone on and off so that you can record videos with or without sound.

Resolution: Sets the default size for newly captured pictures or videos.

Customizing your Camera settings

You can customize the built-in camera’s settings for your Treo 680.

1 Go to Camera View or Camcorder

View .

2 Press Menu . If you are in Camera

View, the Photo Settings screen appears. If you are in Camcorder View, the Video Settings screen appears.

Date stamp: (Pictures only) Determines whether the date the picture is taken appears on your pictures.

Review photos/videos: Determines whether you can review pictures or videos before saving them and how quickly they are automatically saved.

Auto naming: Assigns a name to a series of pictures to be captured, such as Seattle001, Seattle002, and so on.

130


4 Select Done.

Pictures & Videos

Viewing a picture

In addition to viewing the pictures you capture with the built-in camera, you can view pictures captured on many popular digital cameras or downloaded from the

Internet. Your smartphone supports the following picture formats:

•

•

•

•

JPG

TIF

BMP

GIF


Pics&Videos .

2 Select the album that contains the picture you want to see.

TIP

To view an album from an expansion card, insert the card and select the album from the

Album list. If the items on the card are not grouped into albums, select the card name from the list.

3 Select the picture you want to view. next item in the album.

DID YOU KNOW ?

To see the outer edges of a picture that may not be visible, use the stylus to tap and drag the picture in any direction.

131


5 If the picture has a voice caption, select

to hear it.

6 Tap the picture or press Center return to Thumbnail View.

to

•

•

ASF (with MPEG-4 video and

IMA-ADPCM audio)

AVI (with MJPEG video and PCM audio)

TIP

In Thumbnail View, you can group photos or videos to more easily locate them. Select one of the grouping options from the View menu.


Pics&Videos .

2 Select the album that contains the video you want to see.

3 Select the video you want to view.

Playback begins automatically.

Viewing a video

In addition to viewing the videos you capture with the built-in camera, you can view videos captured on many popular digital cameras. Your smartphone supports the following types of video files:

•

•

•

•

•

3GP (with H.263 video and AMR audio)

3G2 (with MPEG-4 video and QCELP audio)

MP4 (with MPEG-4/H.264 video and

MP3/AAC/AAC+ audio)

MPG (with MPEG-1 video and MPEG-1 audio)

M4V (with MPEG-4/H.264 video and

MP3/AAC/AAC+ audio) within the current video, or press Right

or Left to scroll to the next item in the album.

5 Press Center

Thumbnail View.

to return to

DID YOU KNOW ?

If you pause video playback and then close the video, the video starts where you left off the next time you play it.

Viewing a slide show


Pics&Videos .

2 Select the album you want to view.

132

Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C 6 then select Auto-hide Toolbar Off if you want to see the toolbar.

4 Press Space show.

to start the slide

5 Press Center previous view.

to return to the

3 Select the pictures or videos to send, or select Select All to send the entire album. (A + appears next to selected items.)

DID YOU KNOW ?

You cannot send copyrighted pictures or videos that appear with a Lock icon in Thumbnail View or in the Picture list.

TIP

To set slide show options such as background music and transitions, open the

Options menu and select Slideshow

Setting. Keep in mind that background music overrides audio captions when you’re running a slide show. Background music for a slide show also overrides any music that might be playing using the Pocket Tunes application on your smartphone.

4 Select Send.

Sending pictures or videos

You can send pictures or videos to an email address or to other devices that support picture and video messaging.

1 From the Album list, select the album that contains the picture(s) or video(s) you want to send.

2 Select Send .

5 Select how you want to send the picture or video: Messaging,

Bluetooth, or Email.

Copying a picture or video

You can copy pictures or videos into another album. You can also copy pictures and videos between your smartphone and an expansion card.

133


1 From the Album list, select the album that contains the picture(s) or video(s) you want to copy.

2 Press Menu .

3 Select Copy to from the Photo (or

Video) menu.

4 Select the pictures or videos to copy, or select Select All to copy the entire album. (A + appears next to selected items.)

5 Select Copy.

6 Select the Copy items to pick list and select whether you want to copy the selected items to your device or to an expansion card.

+ sign indicates a picture is selected

7 Select the Into album pick list and select the album you want to copy the selected items to.

8 Select Copy.

TIP

You can also move pictures and videos between albums. Open the Photo (or Video) menu and select Move to. The remaining steps are the same as copying pictures, but use the Move commands instead of the Copy commands.

Organizing pictures and videos

1 Open the album you want to organize.

2 Press Menu .

3 Select Album, and then select Add to

album or Remove from album.

4 Select the pictures or videos to add or remove, or select Select All to add or remove the entire album. (A + indicates that you want to add the item. An X indicates that you want to remove the item.)

5 Select Add or Remove.

134


DID YOU KNOW ?

You can also open the Album list from Camera View or Camcorder View by selecting the icon in the lower-left corner.

TIP

Install the Palm ® Files application from the

Palm Software Installation CD to easily browse and manage files on an expansion card.

TIP

To change the name, add a caption, or view other picture or video information, highlight (or open) the item, open the Photo

(or Video) menu, and select Details.

Adding a picture to a contact entry

1 Display the picture you want to add to a contact.

2 Press Menu .

3 Select Options, and then select Save

as Contact.

4 Select the contact you want to add this picture to.

Saving a picture as wallpaper

You can select a picture to use as wallpaper for the Main tab in the Phone application.

1 Display the picture you want to save as wallpaper.

2 Press Menu .

3 Select Options, and then select Save

as Wallpaper.

4 When the confirmation message appears, confirm by selecting Yes, or decline by selecting No.

Rotating a picture

1 Display the picture you want to rotate.

2 Press Menu .

3 Select Rotate from the Photo menu.

4 Select the orientation.

Deleting a picture or video

1 Open the album that contains the picture(s) or video(s) you want to delete.

2 Press Menu .

3 Select Delete from the Photo (or

Video) menu.

4 Select the pictures or videos that you want to delete, or select Select All to delete the entire album. (An X appears next to selected items.)

135



6 Select Delete to confirm the deletion.

the Media icon. You can refer to the

Palm Desktop Online Help for information about using the Palm Media desktop application.

TIP

You can also highlight a picture or video in

Thumbnail View, and then press Backspace to delete the highlighted item.

Pocket Tunes

Viewing pictures and videos on your computer

When you synchronize your Treo 680, your pictures and videos are copied to your desktop computer. You can view pictures in

JPEG format and videos in MPEG-4 format

(3G2 file extension). You can email them to friends using your desktop email application.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN To view and edit videos you captured on your smartphone on your computer, you must first install

QuickTime from the Palm Software

Installation CD.

You can listen to music through the speaker on the back of your smartphone or through a stereo headset or headphones

(stereo headphone adapter or 2.5mm stereo headphone or headset required, sold separately). To listen to music on your smartphone, you need to convert the music files into MP3 format using

Windows Media Player (Windows computers) or iTunes (Mac computers), and then transfer the music files to your smartphone or an expansion card. After you transfer the music files, you can play them using Pocket Tunes on your smartphone.

On a Windows computer, you can view and edit synchronized pictures and videos in the Palm Media desktop application.

Open Palm ® Desktop software and click

136


TIP

You can upgrade Pocket Tunes to a version that supports more music file formats (such as

WMA); supports subscription music; and includes additional features. For more info, visit www.pocket-tunes.com/palm.

DID YOU KNOW ?

If a call comes in when you’re listening to music, you can take the call and the music pauses automatically. After you finish the call, the music starts again.

5 Click the Rip Music tab, click the

Format pick list, and then select mp3.

Click OK.

6 Click Tools, and then click Options.

7 Click the Devices tab, select Palm

Handheld from the Devices list, and then click Properties.

Setting up Windows Media Player for

MP3

On a Windows computer, you need to set

Windows Media Player to save your music files in MP3 format in order for the files to be compatible with Pocket Tunes.

1 Connect your smartphone to your computer with the sync cable.


pTunes .

3 On your computer, open Windows

Media Player, and then click the

full-screen icon in the upper-right corner to maximize the window.

4 Click Tools, and then click Options.

Select your smartphone

Click

Properties

8 Click the Quality tab, uncheck the

Convert files as required by this

handheld (recommended) box. Click

Apply.

137


Uncheck box

3 Click the Advanced button at the top of the window, and then click Importing.

4 Click the Import Using pop-up menu and select MP3 Encoder.

5 Click the Setting pop-up menu and select Good Quality.

TIP

Mac If you want greater control over the file size and sound quality of your MP3 files, select Custom from the Setting pop-up menu.

9 Click OK, and then click OK again.

You now have set up Windows Media

Player to transfer MP3 files to the Pocket

Tunes application on your smartphone.

Setting up iTunes for MP3

On a Mac, use iTunes (included with OS X) to convert music from a CD to MP3 format.

For more information on using the iTunes software, see the documentation that came with your Mac.

1 On your Mac, open iTunes.

2 Select Preferences.

Transferring MP3 files from your computer

If your MP3 files are already on your computer’s hard drive, you just need to transfer them onto your smartphone to listen to them with Pocket Tunes.

If an expansion card is inserted into the smartphone, Windows Media Player copies the MP3 files to the expansion card.

If you don’t have an expansion card inserted, the MP3 files are copied to your

Treo.

IMPORTANT You must synchronize your smartphone with your computer at least once before you can transfer MP3 files from your computer.

138


BEFORE YOU BEGIN On a Mac, you need an expansion card (sold separately) to listen to music on your Treo. You cannot transfer MP3 files from your Mac directly onto your Treo.

Mac: Drag and drop the MP3 files onto the Send To Handheld droplet in the

Palm folder. Select your device name, the file name, and the destination (card).

Click OK. Synchronize your Treo with your computer. Be patient; transferring music to an expansion card can take several minutes.

1 Connect your Treo to your computer with the USB sync cable.


Applications and select pTunes .

3 If you are transferring MP3 files from a

Mac, insert an expansion card into your

Treo. This step is optional for Windows users.


Windows: Open Windows Media

Player on your computer. Select the

Sync tab, and then select Palm

Handheld from the drop-down list.

Select Start Sync. The files are transferred to your smartphone.

NOTE Do not press the sync button on your cable. Windows Media Player transfers the files, so there’s no need to do anything.

TIP

You can also use a card reader accessory

(sold separately) to transfer MP3 files from your computer to your expansion card. Create a Music_Audio folder in the root directory of the card, and store your MP3 files in this folder.

Transferring music from a CD to your smartphone

If your songs are on a CD and you want to listen to them on your smartphone, you need to convert them to MP3 format on your computer before you transfer the files to your smartphone.

139


WINDOWS ONLY

1 On your computer, open Windows

Media Player.

2 Insert the music CD into your computer’s CD drive.

3 Select the Rip tab.

4 Select the tracks you want to convert to

MP3.

5 Select Rip Music.

6 Transfer the MP3 files to your

smartphone as described in Transferring

MP3 files from your computer.

6 Transfer the MP3 files to your

smartphone as described in Transferring

MP3 files from your computer.

Listening to music on your Treo

CAUTION Protect your hearing. Listening to this device at full volume for a long period of time can damage your hearing.

1 Make sure the Ringer switch is set to

the Sound On position. See Silencing sounds for more information.


pTunes .

MAC ONLY

1 On your Mac, open iTunes.

2 Insert the music CD into the CD drive on your Mac.

3 Check the boxes next to the tracks you want to convert to MP3.

4 Click the Import button in the upper-right corner of the iTunes window.

5 When the songs are finished importing, click the Eject Disk button in the lower-right corner of the iTunes window.

TIP

You can change the settings on your Treo so that pressing and holding the Side button

opens Pocket Tunes. See Reassigning buttons

for details.

3 Use the 5-way the following icons: the current song.

to access any of

Play: Plays or resumes playback of

Next song: Plays the next song.

Previous song: Plays the previous song.

140


Choose song: Displays a list of songs to choose from.

Pause: Pauses playback.

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can also press Space to pause and resume playback, as well as use the 5-way to navigate among songs or pause and resume playback.

Pocket Tunes continues playing until it reaches the end of your list or until you select Pause . Music continues to play even if you switch to another application or turn off your screen. If you want to stop playing music when you exit Pocket Tunes, open the Background Prefs menu and uncheck the Enable background play box, and then select OK.

NOTE To adjust the volume during playback, press the Volume button on the side of your Treo.

Progress indicator Play/Pause Volume

Creating a playlist

If you want to play a group of songs in a particular order, you can create a playlist.

1 Press Applications and select pTunes .

2 Press Menu .

3 Select Actions, and then select

Manage Playlists.

4 Select New, and then enter a name for the playlist.

Choose song

Previous song

Next song

141


5 Select Add Song. Select the songs you want to include on the playlist.

6 Select Save List.

TIP

To play songs from a playlist, open Pocket

Tunes, select Choose Songs, and then select

Playlists. Select the playlist you want to play, and then select All.

2 Press Menu .

3 Select Actions, and then select

Manage Playlists.

4 Highlight a playlist, and then select Edit.


•

To delete a song from the playlist, select the song and then select

Remove.

•

To add a song, select Add Song, check a song’s box, and then select Done.

•

To move a song up or down one slot, select a song and then select Up or

Down.

6 Select Save List.

Editing a playlist

TIP

To delete a playlist, select Manage

Playlists from the Actions menu, select the playlist, and then select Delete List. Select

Yes to confirm the deletion.

pTunes .

142

Your personal information organizer

Say good-bye to paper calendars and throw away those scribbled to-do lists. Your Palm ® Treo ™ 680 smartphone is all you need to organize your personal information and keep it with you wherever you go.

You never lose your information, even if your battery is completely drained. All of your personal info is backed up each time you synchronize, and your info is kept private when you use the security features on your Treo. Also, you can easily share info with others electronically.

Benefits

•

Track current, future, and past appointments

•

Make to-do lists that get done

•

•

Set reminders for appointments, birthdays, important tasks, and more

Before you call your friend in

London, check the time first

C H A P T E R

7

In this chapter

Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R 7

Calendar

Calendar is a powerful organizer application that helps you manage your schedule. You can view your calendar by day, week, or month, or as an agenda list that combines your Tasks list and email notifications with your appointments. Schedule repeating meetings or a block of vacation time by creating an event that repeats at an interval you specify. Color-code your appointments by category and add notes with helpful information.

•

•

• list that are overdue or due today. If there’s room, Agenda View also lists events on future dates.

Day View: Shows your daily schedule one day at a time.

Week View: Shows your schedule for an entire week. The time frames are based on the Start Time and End Time settings in Calendar Preferences.

Month View: Shows your schedule for a whole month.

DID YOU KNOW ?

If your company uses

Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, you may be able to wirelessly synchronize Calendar

events directly with the server. See Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync for

information.

Displaying your calendar

Press Calendar repeatedly to cycle through the various views:

•

Agenda View: Shows your daily schedule, the number of unread email messages, and any items on your Tasks

In most Calendar views, you can do the following:

•

•

Open the Options menu and select

Year View to view a calendar for an entire year.

Use the 5-way to go to another day, week, month, or year —based on the current view. (Not available in

Agenda View.)

145

7 Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R

•

Select Go To, and then select a date from the calendar. (Not available in

Agenda View.)

Creating an event

TIP

If you have several appointments to enter, it’s more efficient to use Palm ® Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook on your computer and then synchronize your Treo 680 with your computer. For more information,

see Synchronizing information—the basics.

Press Calendar appears.

until Day View

1 Select Go To and then select the desired day.

Selected date

Selected day

3 Using the keyboard, enter a starting hour and minute for the event, such as

545 for 5:45.

4 Select the End Time box and enter the ending hour and minute for the event.

5 To assign a time zone to the event, select the Time Zone pick list and select a city in the time zone you want.

6 Select OK.

7 Enter a description for the event.

IMPORTANT If you use Palm Desktop software, do not add time zones to your events. Palm Desktop does not support time zones.

0

If you use Microsoft Outlook, you can use the time zone feature, but you must install the conduit that came with your Treo 680

(or a subsequent update) on all the computers with which you sync your smartphone. Chapura PocketMirror and other earlier Microsoft Outlook conduits do not support time zones.

2 Select New.

146


4 Select OK.

TIP

To automatically assign a time zone to your events, open the Options menu, select

Preferences, and check the New events use

time zones box. All your new events will be assigned to your local time zone (existing events aren’t affected), and you can change the time zone setting for individual events.

TIP

If you want your events with time zones to stay at the same time in Calendar, regardless of the time zone you are in, go to Date & Time

Preferences, select the Automatically set pick list, and select Date and time. If you select Date, time and time zone, the event time shifts if you travel to a different time

zone. See Setting the date and time for

information.

Type of time units

Number of time units

DID YOU KNOW ?

When an alarm occurs, the

Alert dialog box displays all your pending alerts. Select an alert description to jump to that item, or check the box to clear that alert.

Adding an alarm to an event

1 In Calendar, select the event.

2 Select Details.

3 Check the Alarm box and select the number of minutes, hours, or days before the event you would like to receive the alarm.

Creating an untimed event

An untimed event, such as a holiday or deadline, does not occur at a particular time.

Press Calendar

View.

until you are in Day

TIP

The alarm for untimed events is defined by minutes, days, or hours before midnight of the date of the event.

date of the event.

6 Make sure no times are highlighted.

147


7 Enter a description for the event.

A diamond appears next to the description of an untimed event.

select Other to define a custom interval.

148

4 Select OK.

Scheduling a repeating event

TIP

To enter a birthday or anniversary, add this info to the person’s Contacts entry and it automatically appears in your Calendar.

TIP

To enter a holiday, create an untimed event. Then, from the Details screen, select

Every year as the repeat interval.

1 Create an event, and then select it.


3 Select the Repeat pick list, and then select a repeat interval. If the interval you need doesn’t appear on the list,

This icon indicates a repeating event.

DID YOU KNOW ?

If you sync with Microsoft

Outlook and your events include other people, a With field appears in the Details dialog box and your attendee info appears in this field after you sync.


Color-coding your schedule

Use color-coding to quickly spot various types of events. For example, make appointments with family green, coworkers blue, and friends red. Follow these steps to create a category and assign it a color code.

1 In Day View, select an event description or select an empty time slot.


3 Select the Category pick list and select

Edit Categories.


•

To create a new category, select New and then enter a category name.

•

To add a color to an existing category, select a category and select Edit.

5 Select the color you want to give this category, and then select OK.

6 (Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add or edit more categories.

7 Select OK two more times.

Now that the categories are set up with colors, you can assign categories to your events to color-code them. See the next section for details.

Changing or deleting an event

1 Select the event you want to edit or delete.


3 In addition to the settings covered earlier in this chapter, you can also change any of the following settings:

Date and Time: Displays when the event takes place. Change these settings to reschedule the event.

Location: Provides a description of where the event takes place.

Category: Sets the color-coded category for this event.

Note : Provides space for you to enter additional text.

Delete: Removes the event from your calendar.

4 Select OK.

TIP

To save memory, you can purge your old events. Open the Record menu and select

Purge. Select the Delete events older than pick list and select a time frame. Select OK.

149


Customizing display options for your calendar

1 Press Menu .


Display Options.

3 Select the Default View pick list and select the view you want to see when you open Calendar.

4 Select Agenda and set any of the following options:

Show Due Tasks: The tasks that are due today and the tasks that are overdue appear in Agenda View.

Show Messages: The number of read and unread email messages displays in

Agenda View.

Background: A favorite photo becomes the Agenda View background. Check the Background box, select the image placeholder, and then select a photo.

Adjust the fade setting so that the text is easy to read against the photo.

5 Select Day and set any of the following options:

Show Category List: The Category pick list appears in Day View.

Show Time Bars: The time bars appear in Day View to show the duration of an event and to illustrate event conflicts.

Compress Day View: When this box is unchecked, all time slots appear on the screen. When this box is checked, start and end times appear for each event, but blank time slots near the bottom of the screen disappear to minimize scrolling.

Show Category Column: The color-coded category marker appears between the time and the description to

150

indicate under which category the event is filed.


7 Select OK.s

6 Select Month and set any of the following options:

Show Category List: The Category pick list appears in Month View.

Timed Events: The events that are scheduled for a specific time appear in

Month View.

Untimed Events: The events that are scheduled for a specific date but not a specific time appear in Month View.

Daily Repeating Events: The events that repeat every day appear in Month

View.

TIP

You can customize your smartphone to display the most current Calendar event in the

Main tab in the Phone application. Press

Phone, open the Options menu, and then select Phone Display Options. Check the

Show Calendar event box.

Selecting alarm tones

1 Press Menu .


Preferences.

3 Select the Application pick list and select Calendar.


151


5 Select the Vibrate pick list and select when you want your smartphone to vibrate for an event alarm.

6 Select tones from any of the following pick lists:

Alarm Sound: The tone that plays the first time your alarm goes off.

Reminder Sound: The tone that plays if an alarm is not acknowledged and the alarm repeats itself.

Repeat: The number of times the alarm repeats itself if the alarm is not acknowledged.

Default Alarm: A default amount of time before the event for which the alarm goes off.

TIP

You can also record sounds and use them as alarms. Select Manage on the Sound &

Alerts Preferences screen.

• To record a sound, select New.

•

•

•

To play a sound, select it and press Center on the 5-way.

To delete a sound, select it and press

Backspace.

To send a sound, select it and then select

Send.

DID YOU KNOW ?

Your Treo includes a silent alarm that can vibrate even when the Ringer switch is set to Sound Off.

World Clock

World Clock displays the day and time in three cities anywhere around the globe.

Whether you’re traveling or staying home, it’s easy to keep track of the best time to reach your business associates, friends, and family in faraway places.

7 Select Done.

152


Selecting cities

World Clock shows the system date and time above the world map. If you selected the option to get the date and time from

the mobile network (see Setting the date and time), your wireless service provider

network automatically updates the time display to match the local time when you travel.

TIP

If you did not select the option to get the date and time from the mobile network, then you can set the city at the top of the screen to a fixed location.

Below the world map, you can view the time in two other cities. If you travel a lot you may want to select your home city as one of these two cities, so that you always know what time it is at home.

World Clock .

2 Select a City pick list, and select a city in the same time zone.

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can run your stylus over the map to see the time in other cities. The shadow over the map represents nighttime moving across the globe.

TIP

World Clock does not automatically update the system time for daylight savings time. To change the Daylight Savings Time setting, see

Setting the date and time.

Adding cities

If the city you want to display is not in the predefined list, you can add it.

1 Select a City pick list and select Edit

List.

2 Select Add.

3 Select a location in the same time zone as the city you want to add, and then select OK.

153


4 Enter the name of the city.

5 Select Location, select Map, select the location of the city, and then select OK.

6 If the city is not on Daylight Savings

Time, uncheck this box. If Daylight

Savings Time is observed, enter Start and End dates.

7 Select OK, and then select Done.

Setting an alarm

The next time you travel, don’t rely on a hotel alarm clock to get you to that important meeting. Use your smartphone instead. World Clock includes a built-in alarm feature that you can use as a travel alarm.

1 Select Off in the upper-right corner.

2 Select the time you want the alarm to sound.

3 Select OK.

Tasks

You can use Tasks to remind you of tasks you need to complete and to keep a record of when you finish tasks.

Adding a task


Tasks .

2 Select New to create a new task.

3 Enter a description of the task. The text can be longer than one line.

TIP

To customize the alarm sound and volume, open the Options menu and select Alarm

Preferences.

TIP

Make sure the Ringer switch is set to

Sound On, so that you can hear the alarm.

Setting task priority, due date, and other details

The Details dialog box enables you to assign a priority level, due date, category, privacy flag, and other details for each task.

154


1 Select the task to which you want to assign details.


3 Set any of the following:

Priority: Select the priority number for this task (1 is most important). Later you can arrange your tasks based on the importance of each task.

repeating task, the next instance of this task automatically appears in your task list.

Private: Check this box to mark this

task private. See Working with private entries for additional information.

: Select this button to enter additional text that you want to associate with the task.

TIP

You can also select the priority from the

Tasks list by selecting the number next to a task and then selecting a priority level.

Category: Assign the task to a specific category.

Due Date: Select the Due Date pick list and select a due date for the task.

4 Select OK.

TIP

If you turn on the Show Due Dates option in the Tasks Preferences screen, you can select the due date in the Tasks list to set a new date.

TIP

Press Menu to access other features such as importing phone numbers into the Tasks list.

Alarm: Set an alarm for this task.

Repeat: Indicate whether the task occurs at regular intervals and how often it repeats. When you check off a

Checking off a task

1 Select the task you want to check off.

2 Press Center or tap in the box to check off the task.

155


TIP

If you accidentally check off a task and need to uncheck it, highlight the task again and press Center on the 5-way to uncheck it.

TIP

You can set Tasks to record the date that you completed a task, and you can select to show or hide completed tasks. Completed tasks remain in the memory of your smartphone until you purge them.

DID YOU KNOW ?

Overdue tasks have an exclamation point (!) next to the due date.

Organizing your tasks

In the Tasks list, select one of these options:

All: Displays all your tasks.

Date: Displays tasks that are due in a specific time frame. With Date selected, press Down to select the pick list, and then press Center to see the various options: Due Today, Last 7 Days, Next 7

Days, or Past Due.

Category: Displays tasks that are assigned to the selected category. Select the

Category pick list to select a different category.

156


Deleting a task

1 Select the task you want to delete.

2 Press Menu .

3 Select Delete Task from the Record menu.

4 Select OK.

TIP

To save memory, you can purge all completed tasks. Open the Record menu and select Purge. Select OK.

Customizing Tasks

The Tasks Preferences screen enables you to control the appearance of the Tasks list screen.

1 In the Tasks list screen, press

Menu .


Preferences.


Sort by: Indicates the order in which your tasks appear in the list.

Show Completed Tasks: Displays tasks you’ve checked off.

Record Completion Date: Replaces due date with the completion date when you complete (check off) the task.

Show Due Dates: Displays task due dates and inserts an exclamation point

(!) next to overdue tasks.

Show Priorities: Displays the priority setting for each task.

Show Categories: Displays the category for each task.

Alarm Sound: Sets the sound for the alarms you assign to your tasks.

4 Select OK.

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can display your tasks in

your calendar. See Customizing display options for your calendar for details.

157


158

Your memos and documents

With its ability to store large amounts of important information, your

Palm ® Treo ™ 680 smartphone lets you take your office with you— including your Microsoft Office and PDF files. You can keep updated copies of the files on both your smartphone and your computer so that you can work on them in the most convenient location any time.

Leave your note pad and voice recorder at home. Use Memos to type notes. Use Voice Memo to record notes, agenda items, and other important thoughts, and play them back, right on your smartphone. You can even send your notes and voice memos to a friend or colleague by attaching them to an email or multimedia message.

Benefits

•

Manage Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and PDF files on your smartphone

•

Improve productivity by taking important docs, spreadsheets, and presentations with you

•

Capture thoughts on the fly

C H A P T E R

8

In this chapter

Documents To Go Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Memos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Voice Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S 8

Documents To Go

Professional

Here are a few more examples of what you can do with Documents:

NOTE The Palm Software Installation CD includes the Documents To Go

®

desktop software. On your smartphone, the companion for Documents To Go is named

Documents and it’s already installed on your smartphone.

With the Documents application, you can take your important office info with you.

You can carry, create, view, and edit

Microsoft Word and Excel files directly on your smartphone. You can also view, carry, and manage PowerPoint and PDF files. For example, you can open email attachments, files you download with the web browser, and files stored on an expansion card—as long as the files are in a supported format.

If you install the Documents To Go desktop software (from the Palm Software

Installation CD), you can use Documents

To Go to transfer files from your computer to your smartphone when you synchronize.

•

•

•

•

Send and receive email attachments in

Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Acrobat file formats (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF).

View Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and

Acrobat files (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF).

Create or edit a Word-compatible document or Excel-compatible spreadsheet on your smartphone, and then save it in the native DOC or XLS format.

Create a PowerPoint presentation on your computer, use the Documents To

Go desktop application to optimize the file for your smartphone, and then sync the file onto your smartphone to view it on the go.

NOTE The Documents application does not support some editing functions, such as multiple font sizes and spell checking.

161

8 Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S

TIP

For more info on the Documents To Go application on your smartphone, go to www.dataviz.com

. If you installed the desktop application from the Palm Software

Installation CD, you can also click the

Documents To Go icon on your computer, and then click Help.

TIP

Install the Files application from the Palm

Software Installation CD to easily browse and manage files on an expansion card.

2 Select the document you want from the list.

TIP

When you work on a file on your smartphone, you can save it to your smartphone or an expansion card. Open the

File menu, select Save As, and then select the location where you want to save the file.

Memos

Opening a document

In the Documents application, you can view and open any Word, Excel,

PowerPoint, or Acrobat (PDF) file on your smartphone or an expansion card that is inserted in the expansion slot.


Documents .

Memos are a great way to store notes on your Treo 680.

DID YOU KNOW ?

Each memo can include 4,096 characters of text.

Creating a memo


Memos .

2 Enter the text you want to appear in the memo.

3 Select Done.

162

Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S 8

TIP

You can assign categories to your memos.

Open the memo you want to change, select the category pick list at the top of the screen, and select a category.

Deleting a memo

1 Open the memo you want to delete.

2 Press Menu .

3 Select Delete Memo from the Record menu.

4 Select OK.

Voice Memo

important thoughts directly on your smartphone.

Creating a voice memo

When recording a voice memo, hold your smartphone with the screen facing towards you while speaking.

1 Press and hold the Side button on your smartphone while recording your memo. After you finish recording, release the Side button.

The memo is automatically saved to your smartphone.

2 (Optional) Enter a title for the memo.

TIP

You can also access Voice Memo, by pressing Applications and selecting Voice

Memo.

TIP

If you need to pause while recording, press and hold Center on the 5-way. Release the button to resume recording.

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can use a voice memo as a ringtone. Highlight the voice memo in the list, open the Voice Memo menu, and then select Copy to Ringtone.

Voice Memo provides a place for you to record and play back notes and other

163

8 Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S

Listening to a voice memo


Voice Memo .

2 In the Voice Memo list, navigate to the voice memo title and then press

Center to select it. The voice memo begins to play.

TIP

To adjust the volume level, press the

Volume button on the side of your smartphone.

TIP

To change a voice memo title, open the

Voice Memo menu and select Rename

Memo.

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can send a voice memo in an email or MMS message (see the documentation for your email application, or

Creating and sending a multimedia message).

You can also use Bluetooth ® wireless technology to send a voice memo to a nearby

Bluetooth device (see Sending info over a

Bluetooth wireless connection).

3 Press Center playback.

to pause or stop

164

Your application and info management tools

Synchronization is a great way to transfer, update, and back up info on your Palm ® Treo ™ 680 smartphone. Synchronizing simply means that info you entered or updated in one place

(your Treo or your computer) is automatically updated in the other. There’s no need to enter info twice.

Expansion cards (sold separately) provide a compact and limitless storage solution. When one card becomes full, simply use another card to carry your extra music and video clips and to install and run cool games and other software, from dictionaries to travel guides.

Benefits

•

Locate info in your applications with the Find feature

•

Install applications, games, and other software

•

•

Quickly enter, update, and protect your info on your computer and your Treo

Store, carry, and exchange info

C H A P T E R

9

In this chapter

Using Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Viewing and using the alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Viewing application info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Sending information with Bluetooth wireless technology . . . . . . . . 174

Beaming information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Synchronizing information—advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Using expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S 9

Using Find

The Find feature locates any text in the built-in applications and databases and in some third-party applications. The Find feature searches for the group of characters you specify, including characters that are part of a word. Find is not case-sensitive.

DID YOU KNOW ?

Find locates any word that begins with the text you enter. For example, entering “plane” finds “planet,” but not

“airplane.”

Viewing and using the alerts

1 Press Option , and then press Shift/

Find to open the Find dialog box.

2 Enter the text you want to find.

3 Select OK to start the search.

4 In the search results, select the text you want to review, or select Find More to continue the search.

The Alert dialog box on your smartphone shows info about incoming items, such as new email messages and Calendar events.

An alert also notifies you when you miss a phone call.

To view the Alert dialog box, tap the blinking bell with your stylus when it appears in the upper-left corner of any screen, or press and hold Center when the blinking bell appears.

167

9 Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

In the Alert dialog box, you can do any of the following:

•

•

•

•

Check the box next to the alert to remove it from the list.

Select the alert to open the corresponding application and view the alert item (message, event, missed call, and so on).

Select Done to close the Alert dialog box. The alert remains active and the bell continues to blink in the upper-left corner of the screen.

Select Clear All to delete all alerts in the Alert dialog box.


Advanced Mode or Basic Mode.

Calculator

Calculator includes a basic calculator, plus an advanced calculator with scientific, financial, and conversion functions.

Switching between Basic and Advanced

Calculator Modes

1 Press Applications and select Calc

.

2 Press Menu .

TIP

In Basic Mode, you can also press Right on the 5-way to switch to Advanced Mode. In

Advanced Mode, press Right on the 5-way to cycle between functions, and press Left on the 5-way to return to Basic Mode.

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can tap the onscreen number pad or use the keyboard to input numbers.

168


Selecting functions in Advanced

Calculator Mode

1 Switch to Advanced Mode (see the preceding procedure).

2 Press Menu .

3 Select Options, and then select the type of function you want to use:

Math: Advanced mathematical functions such as exponents, roots, and logarithms.

Trig: Trigonometric functions such as sine, cosine, tangent, and variants.

Finance: Financial calculator functions such as APR and amortization.

Logic: Hexadecimal characters in keypad, plus logic functions such as

And, Not, Or, and Xor.

Statistics: Statistical functions such as sum, factorial, and random number generator.

Weight/Tmp: Weight and temperature conversions for metric and English values.

Length: Length conversions for metric and English values.

Area: Area conversions for metric, traditional, and English values.

Volume: Volume conversions for metric and English values.

4 Press Menu .

5 Select Pref, and then select the decimal display format: Float, Fixed(x), Sci(x), or Eng(x).

6 Press Menu .

7 Select Pref, and then select the number display format: Degrees, Radians, or

Grads.

TIP

Select Sto to store a number in one of ten memory slots. Select Rcl to recall a stored number.

TIP

Select Con to access a list of mathematical constants such as Avogadro’s number or the speed of light.

169


Installing applications

Your Treo 680 comes with several built-in and ready-to-use applications. You can also install additional applications, such as business software, games, and more. The

Palm Software Installation CD includes several bonus software apps, and you can purchase other third-party Palm OS ® apps as well. To learn about applications you can add to your Treo 680, go to www.palm.com/treo680gsm.

NOTE The instructions in this section tell you how to install basic PRC (Palm OS application) and PDB (Palm OS database) files on your Treo. Some Palm OS software uses an installer or wizard to guide you through the process. For details, consult the documentation that came with the software.

Installing bonus software from the CD

The Palm Software Installation CD includes several bonus software applications that you can install on your smartphone. You can install these applications when you install the desktop software, or you can install them later.

1 Insert the Palm Software Installation CD into the CD drive on your computer.

2 Click Install bonus software.

3 Click the name of the application you want to install.

4 Click Install (on the right side of the screen).

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to install additional applications.

6 Synchronize your smartphone with your computer to install the application(s) on your Treo.

Installing applications from the Internet

You can use the web browser on your Treo to install Palm OS files (PRC or PDB) directly from the Internet. When you download a PRC or PDB file, it is automatically installed on your Treo. If a file is compressed (ZIP or SIT files), you need to download it to your computer, expand the file, and then synchronize to transfer the expanded file to your Treo.

170


1 Open the web browser (see Viewing a web page).

2 Go to the page that contains the link to the application you want to download.

1 Windows: Drag and drop the file(s) onto the Palm Quick Install icon on the

Windows desktop.

Mac: Drag and drop the file(s) onto the

Send To Handheld droplet in the Palm folder.

link to the file, and then press Center

to initiate the download process.

4 Follow the onscreen instructions to accept and install the application.

Installing applications from a computer

When you download an application to your computer, it is probably in a compressed format such as a ZIP or SIT file. If the file is compressed, you need to use a decompression utility on your computer, such as WinZip or Allume Stuffit Expander, before you install the application on your

Treo.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN To install an app from your computer to your Treo, you must first install Palm

®

Desktop software on

your computer (see Installing the desktop synchronization software).

2 Select your device name from the User list, and then click OK.

3 Synchronize your Treo with your computer to install the application(s) on your Treo 680.

171


TIP

Want to install an app to an expansion card rather than your smartphone?

Windows: Open Palm ® Quick Install and drag the file to the Expansion Card pane.

Mac: In the menu for Palm Desktop software, click HotSync, select Install Handheld files, and select expansion card as the file’s destination.

TIP

On a Windows computer, you can also access Palm Quick Install by selecting the

Quick Install icon in Palm Desktop software or from the Programs folder in the Start menu.

Getting help with third-party applications

If you encounter a problem (such as an error message) with a third-party application, contact the application’s author or vendor. For general troubleshooting of

third-party applications, see Third-party applications.

Removing applications

If you decide that you no longer need an application, or you want to free up memory, you can remove apps from your

Treo or an expansion card (for more on

expansion cards, see Inserting an expansion card). You can remove only

apps, patches, and extensions that you install; you cannot remove the built-in apps that reside in the ROM portion of your Treo.

Applications that you cannot remove appear with a Lock icon next to them.

DID YOU KNOW ?

Applications deleted from your smartphone are kept on your computer in the

Archive folder of your user folder. If you have

trouble locating your user folder, see I can’t find my user folder.


2 If you want to remove an application from an expansion card, insert the card into your Treo.

172


3 Press Menu .

4 Select Delete on the App menu.

5 Select the Delete From pick list and select the location of the application you want to remove: Phone or <card

name>.

6 Select the application that you want to remove.


8 Synchronize to remove the application from the Backup subfolder on your computer.

If you upgraded from a previous version of Palm Desktop, your Backup subfolder may be located in the palmOne or

Handspring folder.

2 If you find a PRC or PDB file for the application you just removed, delete the file from the Backup subfolder.

3 Delete the file from your device again.

Viewing application info

Manually deleting applications

If an app you delete reappears on your smartphone, you may need to manually delete the app from your computer.

1 Locate your Backup subfolder on your computer.

Windows: C:\Program

Files\Palm\<device name>.

Mac: Mac

HD\Applications\Palm\Users\<device name>.

The Info screens display basic statistics about the applications on your Treo.


2 Press Menu .

3 Select Info on the App menu.

4 Select the Device pick list and select the location of the app you want to view info for: Phone or <card name>.

173


5 At the bottom of the screen, select the type of information you want to view:

Sending information with Bluetooth wireless technology

Version: The version numbers of applications on your Treo 680.

Size: The size (in kilobytes) of applications and information on your

Treo 680.

Records: The number of entries in various applications on your Treo 680.

6 Scroll to the application you want to see info about.

7 Select Done.

The range of Bluetooth ® wireless technology is up to 30 feet in optimum environmental conditions. Performance and range may be affected by physical obstacles, radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors.

TIP

Check your battery level before establishing a Bluetooth wireless connection.

If the battery level is very low, you can’t make a Bluetooth wireless connection.

Sending info over a Bluetooth wireless connection

In most applications, you can send an individual entry or item such as a contact or a picture. You can also send all the entries in a category, such as all contacts in the

Business category.


Bluetooth .

174


2 Select Bluetooth On.

3 Open an application.

4 Select the entry or category you want to send. You cannot send an item that has a lock next to it.

5 Press Menu .

6 Select Send from the leftmost menu.

7 Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.

8 Select the receiving device(s) from the

Discovery Results list, and then select

OK.

9 Wait for a message to indicate that the transfer is complete before you continue using your Treo.

7 Select the application you want to transfer. You cannot send an item that has a lock

8 Select Send.

next to it.

9 Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.

10 Select the receiving device(s) from the

Discovery Results list, and then select

OK.

11 Wait for a message to indicate that the transfer is complete before you continue using your Treo.

Sending an app over a Bluetooth wireless connection

Bluetooth .


3 Press Applications

4 Press Menu .

.

5 Select Send from the App menu.

6 Select the Send From pick list and select the location of the app you want to send: Phone or <card name>.

Receiving info over a Bluetooth wireless connection


Bluetooth .


3 Select the Visibility pick list and select one of the following:

Visible: Enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Devices list to request a connection with your smartphone. Your smartphone remains accessible to other devices until you turn this option off. After you’re done using this setting, remember to change it back to Hidden.

175


Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Devices list to request a connection with your smartphone during the next two minutes. Your smartphone reverts to the Hidden setting and becomes inaccessible to other devices after two minutes.

4 Use the other device to discover your

Treo 680 and send information to it:

•

See the other device’s documentation to learn how to discover and send information over a Bluetooth wireless connection.

•

If the Ringer switch is set to Sound

On, your Treo beeps to notify you of the connection and then prompts you to accept the info. Select a category or expansion card to file the item(s). If you don’t select a category, the item(s) goes into the Unfiled category.

5 Select Yes to receive the information or

No to refuse it.

TIP

The Device Name in the Bluetooth app is the name other devices with Bluetooth wireless technology see when they connect to your smartphone. The default name is the name you gave your device during setup. You can change this name if you want to.

DID YOU KNOW ?

When you receive an application over a Bluetooth connection, you can store the application on your smartphone or send it to an expansion card inserted into the expansion card slot.

Beaming information

Your Treo 680 is equipped with an IR

(infrared) port so that you can beam information to another device with an IR port—provided the other device supports

IR communications with Palm OS devices.

The IR port is located on the top of your

Treo 680, next to the Ringer switch, behind the small dark shield.

176


TIP

For best results, the path between the two devices must be clear of obstacles, and both devices must be stationary. If you have difficulty beaming, shorten the distance and avoid bright sunlight.

Beam Category: Sends all entries in the current category.

DID YOU KNOW ?

If you beam a bookmark or saved page from the web browser, it beams the URL, not the contents of that page.

Beaming an entry

You can beam an individual entry or item such as a contact or a picture. You can also beam all the entries in the selected category, such as all the contacts in the

Business or Family category.

5 When the Beam Status dialog box appears, point the IR port on your Treo directly at the IR port of the receiving device.

6 Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is complete before you continue using your Treo.

TIP

Beam your business card in two key presses: From the Main tab in the Phone application, press Menu, and then press M.

1 Open the application that holds the entry you want to beam.

2 Select the entry or category you want to beam. You cannot beam an item that has a lock next to it.

3 Press Menu .

4 Select Record, and then select one of the following:

Beam: Sends an individual record.

177


Beaming an application

Not all applications can be beamed. A lock

icon appears on the Beam screen next to applications that cannot be beamed.


2 Press Menu .

3 Select Beam from the App menu.

4 Select the Beam From pick list and select the location of the application you want to beam: Phone or <card name>.

5 Select the application you want to transfer.

6 Select Beam.

7 When the Beam Status dialog box appears, point the IR port on your Treo directly at the IR port of the receiving device.

8 Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is complete before you continue using your Treo.

Receiving beamed information

BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure that the

Beam Receive option in Power

Preferences is On. See Optimizing power settings for details.

1 Turn on your screen.

2 Select the beam command on the transmitting device.

3 Point the IR port on your Treo directly at the IR port of the transmitting device to open the Beam Status dialog box.

4 When the Beam Status dialog box appears, select a category for the entry.

5 Select Yes to receive the information or

No to refuse it.

TIP

If you do not select a category upon receiving a beamed item, the item is placed in the Unfiled category.

TIP

If you can’t receive beamed info, make sure that you are not running a third-party app that disables beaming. If you still can’t receive

a beam, try a soft reset (see Resetting your

Treo).

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can store a beamed app on your smartphone or send it to an expansion card inserted into the expansion card slot.

178


Synchronizing information— advanced

Changing which applications sync

By default, information from Calendar,

Contacts, Memos, Pictures & Videos, and

Tasks is updated each time you synchronize your smartphone. You can change which applications synchronize. For example, if you don’t use the Memos application and you want to speed up synchronization, you can turn off synchronization for Memos.

TIP

Windows If you set up your smartphone to sync with Outlook, you can learn how to change which applications synchronize, by doing the following: Click the HotSync

manager icon in the taskbar and select

Custom. Select a conduit that syncs with

Outlook, click Change, and then click Help.

WINDOWS ONLY

1 Click HotSync

®

manager in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your screen.

2 Select Custom.

3 Select your device name from the User list at the top of the screen.

4 Select the application for which you want to turn synchronization on or off, and then click Change.

5 Select Synchronize the files to turn on synchronization for an app.

Select Do nothing to turn off synchronization for an app that currently synchronizes (for example, to turn off synchronization for Memos if you do not use this app).

179


NOTE If you want the information in one location (smartphone or computer) to completely replace the information in the other location for that app, select one of the two overwrite options. For example, if the Calendar info on your smartphone is accurate but the info on your computer has become corrupted, select Handheld

overwrites Desktop for the Calendar app to have your smartphone info replace your computer info. Note that “handheld” refers to your smartphone and “desktop” refers to your computer.

6 (Optional) If you want to make this change permanent, check the Set as

default box. Otherwise, your change affects only one synchronization (the next one you do); thereafter, the synchronization action reverts to what it was before the change.

7 Click OK.

8 (Optional) To turn synchronization on or off for other apps, repeat steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 for each application you want to change.

9 Click Done.

MAC ONLY in the Palm folder.

2 From the HotSync menu, select

Conduit Settings.

3 From the User pop-up menu, select your device name.

4 Select the application for which you want to turn synchronization on or off, and then click Conduit Settings.

5 Select Synchronize the files to turn on synchronization for an app.

Select Do nothing to turn off synchronization for an app that currently synchronizes (for example, to turn off synchronization for Memos if you do not use this app).

180


NOTE If you want the information in one location (smartphone or computer) to completely replace the information in the other location for that app, select one of the two overwrite options. For example, if the Calendar info on your smartphone is accurate but the info on your Mac has become corrupted, select Handheld

overwrites Macintosh for the Calendar app to have your smartphone info replace the info on your Mac. Note that

“handheld” refers to your smartphone.

Setting up a Bluetooth connection for synchronization

If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, you can synchronize wirelessly over a Bluetooth connection.


Bluetooth .


6 (Optional) If you want to make this change permanent, click Make Default.

Otherwise, your change affects only one synchronization (the next one you do); thereafter, the synchronization action reverts to what it was before the change.

7 Click OK.

8 (Optional) To turn synchronization on or off for other apps, repeat steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 for each application you want to change.

9 Close the Conduit Settings window.



4 Select the Visibility pick list and select

Visible or Temporary.

181


TIP

After you form a partnership with a device, you can change the Visibility setting back to

Hidden. That way only devices with which you’ve already formed a partnership can find your smartphone. New devices cannot request a connection.

0

8 After you finish the HotSync setup, select Done to return to Applications

View.

You’re now ready to sync your Treo 680 with your Bluetooth computer.

5 Select Setup Devices.

6 Select HotSync Setup.

7 Follow the onscreen instructions to create a partnership between your smartphone and your computer.

In some cases you may need to perform setup steps on your computer before you can complete this step.

Check your computer’s documentation for specific setup instructions.

Synchronizing over a Bluetooth connection

When you synchronize using the Bluetooth wireless feature on your Treo, you don’t need your sync cable. This is especially useful if you travel with a laptop enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN on your computer:

Verify the following

•

•

•

It includes built-in Bluetooth wireless technology or a Bluetooth adapter.

Bluetooth is turned on.

HotSync manager is active. On a

Windows computer, you know HotSync manager is active when its icon appears in the lower-right corner of your screen.

182


HotSync .

2 Select Local.

3 Select the pick list below the HotSync icon, and then select the name of the

PC you set up for Bluetooth

synchronization (see Setting up a

Bluetooth connection for synchronization).

4 Select the HotSync smartphone.

icon on your

When synchronization is complete, a message appears at the top of your smartphone screen. Be patient; synchronization may take a few minutes.

Synchronizing over an infrared connection

When you synchronize using the IR port on your Treo, you don’t need your sync cable.

This is especially useful if you travel with an IR-enabled laptop.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN Your computer must include the following items:

•

An enabled IR port and driver or an IR device attached to it. Check your computer’s documentation to see if it supports IR communication.

•

HotSync manager must be active. On a

Windows computer, you know HotSync manager is active when its icon appears in the lower-right corner of your screen.

WINDOWS ONLY

1 On your computer, click HotSync

manager in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your screen. Make sure that Infrared is selected.

183



Applications and select

HotSync .

3 Select Local.

4 Select the pick list below the HotSync icon and select IR to a PC/Handheld.

5 Position the IR port on your Treo within a few inches of your computer’s IR port.


icon on your


MAC ONLY

1 Double-click the HotSync manager icon in the Palm folder.

2 Click the HotSync Controls tab, and then select Enabled.

3 Click the Connection Settings tab, and then check the On box next to IR port.

4 Close the HotSync Software Setup window.



HotSync .

6 Select Local.

7 Select the pick list below the HotSync icon and select IR to a PC/Handheld.

8 Position the IR port on your Treo within a few inches of your Mac’s IR port.


icon on your


184


Using expansion cards

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

The expansion card slot on your Treo 680 enables you to add SD cards and

MultiMediaCard cards to extend the storage capacity of your Treo 680

(expansion cards sold separately). Here are some examples of what SD and

MultiMediaCard expansion cards can store:

Photos

MP3 audio files

Email attachments

Games eBooks

Microsoft Office files

Adobe Acrobat files

Applications

Databases

Your Treo 680 is also compatible with SDIO cards, which you can use to add accessories, such as an FM radio module, to your Treo.

IMPORTANT When using an SDIO card, the SDIO card may protrude from the side of your Treo 680 and prevent you from closing the door of the expansion card slot.

Be careful not to damage the door.

Additionally, some SDIO cards may be too wide to fit inside the expansion door opening, so make sure the SDIO card fits inside the expansion door opening before making your purchase.

Inserting an expansion card

1 Open the expansion slot door.

TIP

SD cards are faster than MultiMediaCard cards for reading and writing information, and

SD cards also offer write-protection.

185


2 Hold your Treo with the screen facing you, and hold the card with the label facing you. The notch on the card should be in the upper corner closest to the screen.

3 Insert the card into the expansion card slot until you feel it lock into place.

Removing an expansion card

1 Open the expansion slot door.

2 Press the card into the expansion slot to release it from the expansion slot.

3 After you feel the expansion card slot eject the card, remove the card from the slot.

TIP

The expansion card slot has a push-push mechanism: push in gently to insert a card; push in gently to remove it.

TIP

If the Ringer switch is set to Sound On, you hear a confirmation tone when you insert or remove an expansion card.

Notch

4 Close the expansion slot door.

4 Close the expansion slot door.

Opening applications on an expansion card

After you insert an expansion card into the expansion card slot, you can open any of the applications stored on the expansion card.

1 Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. The Card category

186

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S 9 of Applications View automatically appears.

2 Select the icon for the application you want to open.

3 Press Center to open the application.

TIP

Install the Files application from the Palm

Software Installation CD to easily browse and manage files on an expansion card.

Accessing items stored on an expansion card

When an expansion card contains items such as pictures or songs, you can’t view them directly from the Card category in

Applications View. You must open the app that recognizes the item.

1 Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. The Card category of Applications View automatically appears.

2 Select the category pick list in the title bar, and select All.

3 Select the icon for the application in which you want to open the item. For example, to view a picture, select

Pics&Videos.

Copying applications between an expansion card and your Treo

You can copy applications from your Treo to your expansion card and vice versa.

TIP

Before you copy an application to an expansion card, make sure that it is compatible with Palm OS software version

5.4.5 or later. Some applications do not work with expansion cards and do not allow you to store files in a location that is separate from the application.

187


1 Press Applications . Viewing expansion card information

188

2 Press Menu .

3 Select Copy from the App menu.

4 Select the Copy To pick list and select the destination: Phone or <card

name>.

5 Select the From pick list and select the location of the application you want to copy: Phone or <card name>.

6 Highlight the application you want to copy.

7 Select Copy.

The Card Info application displays general information about the expansion card that is currently in the expansion slot, and it enables you to rename and format a card.

•

Press Applications and select

Card Info .

Renaming an expansion card

If you change the contents of an expansion card, you may at some point want to rename the card to better match its contents.

1 Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot.

2 Select the category pick list at the top of the screen and select All.


3 Select Card Info

4 Press Menu .

5 Select Rename Card from the Card menu.

6 Enter a new name for the card.

7 Select OK.

.

TIP

If you format a card, any photos or documents that were previously stored on the card are deleted from your desktop software the next time you sync. You can recover these files from the backup folder, or you can prevent the deletion by temporarily changing your sync settings for the affected application to Desktop overwrites handheld.

TIP

If you have trouble copying info to, renaming, or formatting an expansion card, make sure the card is not write-protected.

Press Applications and select Card Info. If a

This card is read-only message appears, then the card is write-protected. If you’re using an

SD card, you can slide the write-protect tab to the opposite position to write to the card. See the instructions that came with your card for additional info.

Formatting an expansion card

Formatting an expansion card is similar to formatting a disk on a computer. When you format an expansion card, you erase all the information stored on the card.

1 Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot.

2 Select the category pick list at the top of the screen and select All.

3 Select Card Info

4 Press Menu .

.

5 Select Format Card from the Card menu.

6 Enter a new name for the card.

7 Select OK.

189


190

Your personal settings

Customizing your Palm ® Treo ™ 680 smartphone is great way to make it match your lifestyle and work even harder for you.

On your Treo , you can easily customize the sounds, fonts, screen colors, and more. Take advantage of different levels of security. Prevent making an accidental (and expensive) phone call by locking the keyboard. Some settings can help extend the life of your Treo battery. There are lots of ways to make your

Treo work better for you.

Benefits

•

Access applications quickly

•

Make your screen easy to read

•

•

Conserve power

Enjoy your smartphone more

C H A P T E R

10

In this chapter

System sound settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Display and appearance settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Applications settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Locking your Treo and info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Connecting to a VPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S 10

System sound settings

Silencing sounds

You can immediately silence all alerts, ringtones, music that plays through the built-in speaker, and system sounds by sliding the Ringer switch to the Sound Off position. This does not mute the audio during a phone call.

1 Slide the Ringer switch to the Sound

Off position. Your smartphone vibrates once to let you know that you’ve turned sounds off.

2 To hear all sounds again, slide the

Ringer switch to the Sound On position.

NOTE For info on setting the vibrate option, see the section on setting alert tones in the chapters that describe the individual applications.

When you slide the Ringer switch back to the Sound On position, it restores the previous sound settings.

Sound On Sound Off

Setting system volume levels

You can set the volume level for system sounds, such as the tone that plays when you synchronize.

TIP

If the Ringer switch is set to Sound Off, the ringer setting overrides the sound settings and all sounds are turned off.


Sounds .

2 Select the Application pick list and select System.

193

10 Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S

3 Select the System Volume and Game

Volume pick lists and select the volume levels.

Backlight brightness.

3 Select Done.

4 Select Done.

TIP

To temporarily set the backlight to the preset low setting, press Option + Menu.

TIP

You can also adjust the backlight and set the brightness duration during a call in Power

Preferences. See Optimizing power settings.

Display and appearance settings

Adjusting the brightness

Depending on the lighting conditions in which you’re using your Treo, you may need to adjust the brightness of the screen and keyboard backlight.

1 Press Option , and then press

Backlight .

Changing the screen font

You can change the screen font in

Calendar, Contacts, Memos, Messaging,

Tasks, and Web. The font styles may vary between applications and some applications may offer fewer choices.

1 Open the application in which you want to change the font.

2 Press Menu .

3 Select Options, and then select Font.

194


4 Select a font style. (In the web browser, select the Font size pick list and select

Large or Small.)


Preset to: The standard number conventions for your country. When you select a country, the other Formats

Preferences are automatically set to that country’s conventions. You can also edit each option individually.

Small font

Small bold font

Large font

Large bold font

5 Select OK.

Setting display formats

Formats Preferences enable you to select number conventions based on geographic regions. For example, in the United

Kingdom, time often is expressed using a

24-hour clock. In the United States, time is expressed using a 12-hour clock with an

AM or a PM suffix. Many of the built-in applications on your Treo 680 use the

Formats Preferences settings.

Prefs .

2 Select Formats.

Time: The time format. Select HH:MM to display a 24-hour clock.

Date: The date format.

Week starts: The first day of the week

(usually Sunday or Monday).

Numbers: The format for numbers with decimal points and commas.

4 Select Done.

195


Aligning the screen to correct tapping problems

Occasionally, your Treo screen may need to be readjusted. If this problem occurs, you may see the wrong feature being activated when you tap the screen. To fix the problem, you can align the screen at any time.

Changing the system color scheme


Prefs .

2 Select Color Theme.

3 Select a color scheme from the list.

Prefs .

2 Select Touchscreen.

3 Follow the onscreen instructions and tap the screen where indicated.

4 Select Done.

TIP

You can also set the wallpaper for the

Main tab in the Phone application (see

Customizing the Main tab in the Phone application) and the background for Calendar

Agenda View (see Customizing display options for your calendar).

4 Select Done.

196


Applications settings

You can change the Applications settings on your Treo so that you can easily access the applications you use most often.

You can arrange and display your applications by category, reassign the buttons on your Treo, and select default applications for specific tasks.

TIP

To create a new category, select the

category pick list and select Edit Categories.

Select New, and then enter the category name. Select OK to close the dialog box, and then select OK.

DID YOU KNOW ?

If there is an expansion card in the expansion slot, the card appears in the category pick list and is treated as a category when you press Applications repeatedly.

Arranging applications by category

You can assign an application to a category and then display a specific category of applications in Applications View.


2 Press Menu .

3 Select Category on the App menu.

4 Select the pick list next to each application and select a category.

5 Select Done.

Displaying applications by category

Do one of the following:

•

•

Press Applications repeatedly to cycle through the categories.

Select the category pick list at the top of the screen and select a category.

Select All to display all of your applications.

Changing Applications View

By default, Applications View displays each application as an icon. As an alternative, you can view a list of applications. The list view is particularly useful when you have so many applications in a category that the applications fill up more than one screen.

197



2 Press Menu .


Preferences.

4 Select the View By pick list and select

List.

5 Select OK.

3 Select the pick list next to the item you want to reassign, and then select an application.

Reassigning buttons

With Buttons Preferences, you can select which applications are associated with the quick buttons and the Side button on your

Treo. You can assign a primary and secondary application to each of the three quick buttons that open an application.

NOTE We recommend that you keep the primary button assignments on the factory settings until you become comfortable with the features of your smartphone. If you do change the primary button assignments, remember that the instructions in this guide and in the other help features refer to the original button settings.

4 Select Done.

DID YOU KNOW ?

You can also choose an application to open with the sync button on the USB sync cable. To change this setting, select HotSync on the Buttons Preferences screen.

TIP

To restore all the buttons and key combinations to their factory settings, select

Default.

DID YOU KNOW ?

Some third-party applications automatically take over a button when you install the application.

Prefs .

2 Select Buttons.

198


Changing default applications

Sometimes one application looks for another application to handle information

(for example, a mail application might open a browser when you select a link in an email message). Your smartphone comes with a set of predefined applications to handle email, messaging, and browser requests from other applications. If you have more than one application to handle these requests on your smartphone, you can specify which application you want to use for each function.

Prefs .

2 Select Default Apps.

3 Select each pick list and select the application you want to associate with that function.

4 Select Done.

Locking your Treo and info

Your Treo includes several features to protect your smartphone from inadvertent use and keep your information private. You can lock any of the following features on your smartphone:

Keyboard (Keyguard): You can use the

Keyguard feature to disable the keyboard and all buttons to prevent accidental presses in your bag or pocket.

Screen: You can disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature during an active call or call alert.

Phone (Phone Lock): You can set your phone to require a password to make calls.

The built-in security software lets you make emergency calls even if your phone is locked.

199


Treo: You can set your Treo to require a password for you to see any information on your Treo.

Entries: You can mask or hide entries marked as private and set your smartphone to require a password for viewing them.

2 Press Center to turn off Keyguard.

Locking your keyboard (Keyguard)

The Keyguard feature locks the keyboard so that you don’t accidentally press buttons or activate items on the screen while your smartphone is in a pocket or bag.

By default, Keyguard turns on whenever the screen is off. Each time you wake up the screen, you must turn off Keyguard to unlock the keyboard and use your smartphone.

To turn off Keyguard, do the following:

1 When the screen is off, press Power/

End to wake up the screen.

You can change how quickly Keyguard turns on, or you can disable this feature altogether. To change the Keyguard settings, do the following:


Prefs .

2 Select Keyguard.

3 Select the Auto-Keyguard pick list, and then do one of the following:

•

Select how quickly you want Keyguard to turn on: When power is turned

off, 5 seconds after power off, or 30

seconds after power off.

•

Select Disable to completely disable the Keyguard feature until you turn it on again by pressing Option +

200


Power/End o n.

4 Select Done.

Locking your screen situations. when the screen is

You can set your smartphone to automatically lock the screen’s touch-sensitive features in certain

.

2 Select Keyguard.

3 Check any of the following boxes:

Incoming calls received: Disables the screen when the phone rings. You must use the 5-way to select the onscreen Answer and Ignore buttons, or press Send or Power/End call.

to answer the call

to ignore the

On a call: Disables the screen after you answer a call. You must use the 5-way

to select the onscreen buttons during the call. Use this setting to avoid accidentally pressing onscreen buttons while you’re holding your smartphone near your ear to speak.

4 Select Done.

DID YOU KNOW ?

When you check the boxes to disable the touchscreen during a call, the touchscreen is automatically enabled again after you end the call.

Locking your phone (Phone Lock)

You can lock your SIM card to prevent unauthorized calls and use of other wireless features. When your SIM card is locked, you must enter the correct PIN code to unlock it, even if you move it to a different phone. You can still make emergency calls when your phone is locked, however.

IMPORTANT If your SIM card is locked and you enter the wrong PIN more than three times, you must call your wireless service provider for your unique PIN unlock key (PUK) to unlock your SIM card.

TIP

When Phone Lock is turned on, other people can still see the info on your smartphone, but they cannot make or receive phone calls or use the other wireless features without your password.

201


1 Press Phone .

2 Press Menu .


Lock.

4 Check the Lock SIM box.

5 When prompted, enter the current PIN and select OK. (Unless you changed your PIN, enter the default PIN, provided with your wireless service provider’s account materials.)

6 If you want to change the PIN, select

Change PIN, enter a new PIN, and then select OK. Repeat this step to verify the new PIN.

7 If your SIM card supports fixed number dialing (FDN), select Advanced and check the Enable Fixed Number

Dialing box to restrict dialing to the numbers in your FDN list. When prompted, enter your PIN2 and then select OK.

8 Turn your phone off to activate the phone lock feature.

9 To turn your phone on again, press and hold Power/End , enter your

PIN, and then select OK to unlock your smartphone.

TIP

To manage your FDN list, press

Applications select SIM Book, press Menu, and then select Modify FDN from the

Options menu.

Your SIM card locks again when you turn off your smartphone and then turn it back on.

To disable the current Phone Lock settings:

1 Press Phone .

2 Press Menu .


Lock.

4 Uncheck the Lock SIM box.

5 Enter your PIN code.

6 Select OK.

Locking your Treo

To protect your personal information, you can lock your Treo 680 so that you need to enter your password to access any of your information or use any of the features on your Treo, including the phone. You can, however, still make emergency calls when your Treo is locked.

202


IMPORTANT If you lock your Treo, you must enter the exact password to unlock it.

If you forget the password, you need to perform a hard reset to resume using your

Treo. Performing a hard reset deletes all the entries in your Treo. If you use password protection in Palm Desktop software, you must remember your password to restore your info. However, if you do not use password protection in

Palm Desktop software, you can restore all previously synchronized info the next time

you sync (see Synchronizing information— the basics).

4 Select the Auto Lock Device box.

5 When prompted, enter your password and select OK.

6 Select one of the following options:

Never: Prevents your Treo from locking automatically.

Security .

2 Select the Password box.

3 Assign a password and a password hint.

On power off: Locks your Treo when you turn off the screen, or when it shuts off with the Auto-off feature.

At a preset time: Locks your Treo at a specific time of day.

After a preset delay: Locks your Treo after a period of inactivity.

7 Select OK.


•

Select Lock & Turn Off to lock your

Treo immediately.

203


•

Press Applications to accept your settings and continue using your

Treo.

TIP

After you create a password, you can lock your system manually. Press Applications and select Security. Select Lock & Turn Off, and then select Off & Lock.

TIP

To change your password, select the

Password box, enter your current password, and then enter the new password. To delete your password, select the Password box and then select Unassign.

After you enable the mask or hide setting, any entries marked as private are immediately hidden or masked. If you define a password, you must enter it to display private entries. If you do not define a password, you (or anyone else) can reveal private entries without a password.

1 Open the entry that you want to mark private.


3 Check the Private box.

4 Select OK.

Working with private entries

In most applications, you can mark individual entries as private. All private entries remain visible and accessible until you select the Security setting. You have three Security setting options:

Show Records: Private records are visible.

Hide Records: Private entries do not appear anywhere in the application.

Mask Records: Private entries are replaced with a gray bar that lets you know the entry is there but keeps it from being legible.

Hiding or masking all private entries

Make sure the entries you want to mask or hide are marked private.


Security .

2 Select the Current Privacy pick list and select either Hide Records or Mask

Records.

3 If prompted for your password, enter it and then select OK.

204


Viewing all private records

You can reveal all the entries you’ve hidden or masked.

Security .

2 Select the Current Privacy pick list and select Show Records.


Viewing private entries in a specific application

1 Open the application that contains the private entries you want to see.

2 Press Menu .


Security.

4 Select the Current Privacy pick list and select Show Records.

5 Select OK.


Security and Palm Desktop software

(Windows)

You can set the Windows version of

Palm ® Desktop software to observe the security password for your Treo 680. If you forget your password, you cannot view your information in Palm Desktop. If your smartphone is unlocked, you can change your password on your smartphone, but all entries marked as private are deleted. You can restore your private entries the next time you sync and then create a new password.

Follow these steps to recover from a lost password:


Security .

2 Select the Password box.

3 Select Lost Password.

4 Select Yes.

TIP

If you want additional security for

Palm Desktop files, you may want to purchase a third-party solution.

205


Entering owner information

You can use Owner Preferences to record information that you want to associate with your Treo 680, such as your name, company name, and home phone number.

If you lock your Treo (see Locking your

Treo), the Owner Preferences information

appears on the screen that requests your password to unlock it, and you must also enter your password to change the Owner

Preferences information.

5 Select Done.

Prefs .

2 Select Owner.

3 If you assigned a password with the

Security application, select Unlock, enter your password, and then select

OK to continue.

4 Enter the text that you want to appear in the Owner Preferences screen.

System settings

Setting the date and time

Date & Time Preferences enable you to manually set the date, time, and location

(time zone) setting for your smartphone.

You can also set your Treo to synchronize the date, time, and time zone with your wireless service provider network when your phone is on, you are inside a coverage area, and the date, time, and time zone are available from the network.


Prefs .

2 Select Date & Time.

206


3 Select the Automatically set pick list and select one of the following settings:

Date, time and time zone: The date, time, and time zone are acquired from your wireless service provider’s network (if settings are available from the network).

Date and time: Lets you set the time zone manually. The date and time are acquired from your wireless service provider’s network (if settings are available from the network).

Nothing: Lets you set the date, time, and time zone manually. No info is acquired from your wireless service provider’s network.

4 If the Location pick list appears, select it, and then select a city in your time zone.

TIP

If a city in the same time zone is not on the list, select Edit List, select Add, select a city in your time zone, and then select OK. If necessary, modify any of the settings in the

Edit Location dialog box, and then select OK.

5 If the Date and Time fields appear, select the Date field and select the date, and then select the Time field and select the time.

6 Select Done.

TIP

You can also set time zones for Calendar

events. See Creating an event.

Optimizing power settings

Power Preferences enable you to adjust settings to maximize the battery’s performance.


Prefs .

2 Select Power.

207



Brightness: Sets the intensity of the screen and keyboard backlights. Drag to adjust the brightness level.

Beam Receive: Determines whether your Treo is ready to receive information over an infrared beam. If you leave this option turned off, you must return to this screen to turn on this option the next time you want to receive a beam.

4 Select Done.

TIP

You can also access the brightness setting by pressing Option + P. To temporarily set the backlight to the preset low setting, press

Option + Menu.

Connecting to a VPN

Auto-off after: Determines how long your screen stays on during a period of inactivity. When there is no interaction with the keyboard or screen for the specified time period, your smartphone turns off automatically.

On a call, dim backlight after:

Determines how long the backlight stays on at normal intensity during a phone call. After the specified time period, the backlight dims to conserve power during a long phone call.

If you want to use your Treo to access your corporate email account or other files on your corporate server, you may need to set up a virtual private network (VPN) on your

Treo. A VPN enables you to log in to your corporate server through the company’s firewall (security layer). You need a VPN client on your smartphone if your smartphone and your company’s server are located on opposite sides of the firewall.

208


Check with your company’s system administrator to see if a VPN is required to access the corporate server. If a VPN is necessary, you must purchase and install a third-party VPN client on your smartphone to use this feature.

1 Install your third-party VPN client. See

Installing applications for details.


Prefs .

3 Select VPN.

4 Enter the settings provided by your corporate system administrator.

TIP

For information about third-party VPN client software, see the Palm Software

Installation CD or visit www.palm.com/ treo680gsm.

209


210

Common questions

Although we can’t anticipate all the questions you might have, this chapter provides answers to some of the most commonly asked questions. For additional information and answers to other common questions, visit www.palm.com/ treo680gsm-support.

C H A P T E R

11

In this chapter

Upgrading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Desktop software installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Resetting your Treo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Hands-free devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Making room on your Treo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Third-party applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S 11

Upgrading

If you experience problems with your

Palm

®

Treo

™

680 smartphone after performing the upgrade steps in this guide, you may have incompatible applications or settings that were not quarantined during the installation process. These

Incompatible applications or settings can lead to numerous issues, including system resets and freezes. If you experience a problem after upgrading, follow the steps in this section to remove the incompatible apps from your smartphone and to transfer your other info to your new smartphone.

NOTE If you have trouble installing a third-party application, contact the developer for assistance.

We recommend that you do not install apps that do any of the following:

•

•

Modify phone functions, such as ringtones, dialing, or caller ID

Replace organizer features, such as

Contacts or Calendar

•

•

•

Set data connection features, such as activating or ending data connections

Provide web clipping features, such as

PQA files

Provide instant messaging features

If you want to continue using these types of applications, please contact the third-party developer for software updates and info about compatibility with your Treo

680.

WINDOWS ONLY

1 On your computer, click

Start>Programs>Palm>Safe HotSync.

2 Follow the instructions on the screen.

3 Locate the Old_Apps folder on your computer. This folder is usually located inside one of the following folders:

C:\Program Files\Palm\

C:\Program Files\palmOne\

C:\Program Files\Handspring\

4 To help you identify the app that is causing the problem, move one app at a time from the Old_Apps folder to the

Backup folder, and then sync.

213

11 C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

If the problem recurs, delete the last app you installed and report the problem to its developer.

5 Repeat step 4 for each of the apps in the Old_Apps folder.

NOTE If you have trouble moving apps from the Old_Apps folder to the Backup folder, or determining which files to move, try reinstalling the app using the original third- party developer files.

TIP

Need more info on the Backup folder? See

What is the backup folder?.

MAC ONLY

1 Locate your user folder on your computer.

NOTE Your user folder name is the same as your device name and is usually found in this location: <Mac hard drive> : Users :

<your Mac username> : Documents :

Palm : Users

2 Select your user folder and Option-drag it to your Mac desktop to make a copy of that folder.

3 Confirm that your copy includes the

Backup subfolder and that all the files in the original Backup subfolder are also in the copy of the Backup subfolder.

4 Delete all files from the original Backup subfolder.

5 Perform a hard reset on your Treo 680.

See Resetting your Treo for instructions.

6 Sync your Treo 680 with your new desktop software and be sure to select your existing device name from the

User list.

7 To help you identify the app that is causing the problem, move one third-party app from the copy of the

Backup subfolder to the original

Backup subfolder, and then sync.

If the problem recurs, delete the last app you installed and report the problem to its developer.

8 Repeat step 7 for each of the third-party apps in the copy of the Backup folder.

214


Desktop software installation

If you are having trouble installing the desktop software, you may have the wrong version of the software or some of your computer’s resources may be unavailable.

TIP

The Palm Software Installation CD installs software that lets you synchronize using

Palm ® Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook for Windows. If you want to synchronize using a different personal information manager

(PIM), you must install a third-party solution.

Contact the PIM’s author or vendor to learn if software is available for your Treo 680.

3 Quit any active applications, including virus scanners and Internet security applications.

4 Make sure you’re installing the software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your new Treo 680.

Other versions of the desktop software may not work with your Treo 680.

5 Insert the Palm Software Installation CD to restart the installation.


Follow these steps to retry the installation.

1 Make sure your computer profile includes administrator rights to install software. In large organizations, these are usually granted by the system administrator.

2 Restart your computer.

Resetting your Treo

Performing a soft reset

A soft reset is similar to restarting a computer. If your Treo is not responding or you have trouble synchronizing with your computer, a soft reset may help. All your

215

11 C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S info is retained when you perform a soft reset.

1 Remove the battery from your smartphone, and then reinsert it.

Don’t know how? See Replacing the battery.

NOTE The reset begins when you reinsert the battery.

2 At the end of the soft reset, Date &

Time Preferences appears. Select

Done.


2 When the Palm logo appears, press and hold Up until the black status bar at the bottom of the screen fills and disappears, and then release Up .

3 Delete the third-party application that you suspect is causing the problem.

4 Perform a soft reset. The wireless features of your smartphone are not available until you complete this step.

Performing a system reset

A system reset, also called a safe or warm reset, tells your Treo to stop what it’s doing and start over again without loading any system extras. If your Treo loops or freezes during or after a soft reset, a system reset may help. Performing a system reset can release your Treo from an endless loop so that you can uninstall a third-party application that may be causing the looping.


Performing a hard reset

A hard reset erases all information and third-party software on your Treo. Never perform a hard reset without first trying a soft reset, a system reset, and trying to resolve third-party software issues. (See

Third-party applications for suggestions on

diagnosing third-party software issues.)

After a hard reset, you can restore previously synchronized information the next time you sync.

IMPORTANT If you set a password on your smartphone, performing a hard reset reformats your smartphone. This is a more severe form of a hard reset, which

216

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S 11 removes all your information, and restores your formats, preferences, and other settings to the factory default settings. your smartphone until the process is complete. This may take up to 10 minutes.

TIP

Some third-party applications do not create a backup on your computer when you synchronize. If you perform a hard reset, you may lose data in these applications and you will need to reinstall the application after the hard reset. Please contact the application’s developer to find out which data is backed up during synchronization.



2 When the Palm logo appears, press and hold Power/End until the black status bar at the bottom of the screen fills and disappears, and then release

Power/End .

3 When the Erase all data? prompt appears, press Up to confirm the hard reset.

IMPORTANT If a Reformatting in

progress message appears, do not touch

4 When the language selection screen appears, select the same language you selected for your desktop software.


5 (Optional) If you want to confirm that the hard reset was successful, press


HotSync . If you see your device name in the upper-right corner, the hard reset was not successful.

Replacing the battery

Your Treo 680 comes with a replaceable battery. Be sure to use a replacement battery that is recommended or sold by

Palm and is compatible with the Treo 680.

217


CAUTION Failure to use the proper battery may result in a risk of personal injury or product damage, and it voids your smartphone warranty.

1 Press Power/End the screen.

to turn off

2 Press the Battery door release button, and slide the battery door downward to remove it from your smartphone.

45-degree angle, and then press it into place.

Battery contacts

Smartphone contacts

Notch

Battery door release button

3 Place a finger in the notch next to the battery, and lift up the old battery at a

45-degree angle to remove it from the compartment.

4 Align the metal contacts on the new battery with the contacts inside the battery compartment, insert the new battery into the compartment at a

IMPORTANT Use the battery that came with your Treo 680. Do not use a battery from another Treo model in your Treo 680.

Similarly, do not use the Treo 680 battery in another Treo model. Using a battery that is designed for another Treo model can damage your Treo 680.

5 Slide the battery door onto the back of the smartphone until it clicks into place.

6 Connect your Treo to the charger or sync cable to charge the new battery.

218


TIP

Be sure to dispose of your old battery properly. In some areas, disposal in household or business trash is prohibited.

5 If the problem persists, connect your

Treo to the charger (see Charging the battery) and perform a soft reset again.

6 If that doesn’t work, perform a hard

reset (see Performing a hard reset).

Screen

TIP

To find carrying cases that protect the screen and other useful accessories, visit www.palm.com/treo680gsm.

The screen appears blank

1 When a call lasts longer than the limit specified in Power Preferences, the screen dims automatically. In certain lighting conditions, the screen may appear blank when this occurs.

Press any key except Power/End to restore the screen to normal brightness.

Pressing Power/End hangs up the call.

The screen doesn’t respond accurately to taps or it activates wrong features


2 Use the 5-way

3 Use the 5-way

Touchscreen.

to select Prefs

to select

2 When a period of inactivity lasts longer than the limit specified in Power

4 Follow the onscreen instructions to align the screen.

Preferences, the screen turns off. Press 5 Select Done.

to

6 If the problem persists, check for dirt wake up the screen.

between the screen and the edge of the

3 Look closely at the screen. If you can smartphone. see a dim image, try adjusting the

7 If you’re using a screen protector, make

screen brightness (see Adjusting the

sure that it is properly installed.

brightness).

.

4 If the screen is still blank, perform a soft

reset (see Performing a soft reset).

219


There’s a blinking bell in the upper-left corner

The blinking bell in the upper-left corner of the screen is the Alert icon. It appears when you have alarms or messages that you haven’t acknowledged.

1 Press and hold Center or tap the blinking bell with your stylus.

2 When the list of pending alerts appears, do any of the following:

•

Select the text of the alert to view the item. The item stays in the list.

•

Check the box next to an alert to clear it from the list, and then select Done.

your info by synchronizing with your smartphone. To make sure you always have an up-to-date backup of your info, synchronize frequently.

This section describes synchronization between your Treo and a desktop computer running Palm Desktop software.

You can also synchronize the information on your Treo using third-party applications.

See the documentation for the third-party application for information on features and configuration.

Before you attempt to synchronize, make sure you’ve installed the desktop synchronization software from the Palm

Software Installation CD.

Synchronization

TIP

Every device needs a unique name. Never synchronize more than one device to the same device name on your computer.

Synchronization backs up the information from your Treo onto your computer and vice versa. If you ever need to perform a hard reset or otherwise need to erase all your information on your smartphone, you can synchronize your smartphone with your computer to restore the info. Similarly, if your computer crashes and your Palm

Desktop info is damaged, you can recover

I can’t find my user folder

Windows: If your device name is one word, your user folder name is the first six characters of your device name. If your device name is two words, your user folder name consists of the first six characters of

220

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S 11 the second word of your device name followed by the first letter of the first word.

For example, if your device name is John

Smith, your user folder is named SmithJ.

Your user folder is usually located inside one of the following folders:

C:\Program Files\Palm\

C:\Program Files\palmOne\

C:\Program Files\Handspring\

Mac: Your user folder name is the same as your device name and is usually found in this location: <Mac hard drive> : Users :

<your Mac username> : Documents :

Palm : Users

If an app that you deleted reappears on your smartphone, try deleting the app from your Backup folder.

Palm Desktop does not respond to a sync attempt

1 Make sure that the USB sync cable is securely connected to the USB port on your computer and on the bottom of

your smartphone (see Synchronizing information—the basics).

What is the backup folder?

The Backup folder is located inside your

user folder (see I can’t find my user folder).

During synchronization, HotSync

®

Manager puts a copy of most of your info and applications in the Backup folder. (Some third-party apps do not put a copy in the

Backup folder.) The next time you sync,

HotSync Manager compares the contents of the Backup folder to the contents of your smartphone, and then restores any missing info or applications.

TIP

If you’re having trouble trying to sync using an IR or Bluetooth ® wireless technology connection, try using the USB sync cable instead. If this solves the problem, then check your IR or Bluetooth settings (see

Synchronizing information—advanced).

2 Make sure that HotSync manager is running:

Windows: Right-click HotSync

manager in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen, and make sure that Local USB is checked. If you don’t see the HotSync manager icon, click Start, select

Programs, select Palm, and then select

HotSync Manager.

221


Mac: Find the Palm folder on your Mac hard drive. Double-click the HotSync

manager icon in the Palm folder. In the Connection Settings panel, set the

Local Setup port to Palm USB.

3 Synchronize. If the synchronization is successful, you do not need to complete the remaining steps.

4 Perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset).


6 If problems persist and you’re synchronizing through a USB hub, try connecting the sync cable to a different

USB port or directly to your computer’s built-in USB port.


8 Check the multi-connector on the bottom of your smartphone for debris or discoloration. Carefully clean the connector by dipping a cotton swab in some rubbing alcohol and gently wiping the metal contacts on the connector.

Try to sync again.

9 Check the connector on the USB sync cable for integrity and cleanliness. Make sure the pins on the connector are straight, protruding, and not damaged. If the cable appears to be damaged, stop here and locate another USB sync cable.

10 WINDOWS ONLY Uninstall

Palm Desktop software. Click Start, select Settings, select Control Panel, select Add or Remove Programs, select Palm Desktop software, and then click Change/Remove.

NOTE Mac computers do not provide an option for uninstalling Palm Desktop software. Contact Technical Support if the problem persists after completing step 7.

11 Reboot your computer.

12 Reinstall Palm Desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your Treo 680.

222


Synchronization starts but stops without finishing

TIP

The HotSync Log can give you information about your most recent synchronization.

Windows: Right-click the HotSync manager icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen, and then select View

Log.

Mac: Open Palm Desktop software. From the

HotSync menu, select View Log.

If you upgraded from a previous Palm OS ® device or received a system error, such as

Sys0505, there may be conflicts with software on your smartphone.

1 Locate your Backup subfolder and rename the folder (for example,

BackupOld).

Windows: C:\Program

Files\Palm\<device name>

Mac: <Mac hard drive> : Applications

: Palm : Users : <device name>

NOTE Can’t find a Palm folder in Program

Files? Then look for a palmOne or

Handspring folder instead. For more info,

see I can’t find my user folder.

2 Synchronize.

3 If the problem is resolved, begin reinstalling your third-party applications one at a time by double-clicking a single file in the original Backup subfolder that you renamed, and sync after each application you install. If the problem recurs, delete the last application you installed and report the problem to its developer.

4 WINDOWS ONLY If the Windows

New Hardware Wizard appears, the synchronization process may be timing out before the wizard completes its job.

Follow all instructions in the New

Hardware Wizard, and then sync again.



NOTE Mac computers do not provide an option for uninstalling Palm Desktop software. Contact Technical Support if the problem persists after completing step 3.


223



Synchronization finishes but info doesn’t appear where it should

1 Make sure you’re synchronizing with the intended desktop personal information manager (PIM). The Palm

Software Installation CD enables you to choose whether you want to synchronize with Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook for

Windows. Reinsert the installation CD and select Change your

synchronization method if necessary.

If you use a different PIM, you need to install third-party software to synchronize. For more information, consult the company that makes the

PIM.

2 If multiple Palm OS devices are synchronizing with your computer, make sure the name of the device you are synchronizing appears in the User field on the toolbar of Palm Desktop software.

3 Open HotSync manager on your computer, and make sure the necessary conduits are set to Synchronize the

files.

NOTE If you need to change the setting to

Synchronize the files, be sure to check the Set as default box as well.



MAC ONLY Mac computers do not provide an option for uninstalling Palm

Desktop software. Contact Technical

Support if the problem persists after completing step 3.



7 (Outlook only) If you’re trying to synchronize offline, set your Outlook

Calendar, Contacts, Notes, and Tasks to be available offline.

224


TIP

Outlook subfolders and public folders are not accessible with the included software. You may wish to use a third-party solution instead.

TIP

(Outlook only) If you want to sync your info with a global Exchange Address Book, you must copy the addresses to your local

Contacts list in Outlook (right-click the addresses and select Add to Personal

Address Book).

TIP

For more info on Outlook conduits, right-click the HotSync manager icon in the taskbar, select Custom, select an app with

Outlook in its name, and then select Help.

5 Click Change.

6 Select Desktop overwrites handheld, and then click OK.

7 If more than one application has duplicate entries, repeat steps 4 through 6 for each application with duplicates.

8 Click Done.

9 Synchronize your smartphone and your computer.

I have duplicate entries in Microsoft

Outlook after I sync

1 Open Microsoft Outlook and delete the duplicate entries.

2 On your computer, go to the application with duplicate entries and manually enter any info you added to your smartphone since the last time you synchronized.

3 Right-click HotSync manager in the taskbar and select Custom.

4 Select an application that has duplicate entries and also has Outlook in its name.

My appointments show up in the wrong time slot after I sync

If you create an appointment in the wrong time zone (i.e., your desktop was set to the wrong time zone), it shows up in the wrong time zone on your Treo. To be safe, enable local network time and avoid assigning time zones to your appointments.

If you’re using Microsoft Outlook:

1 Make sure that you installed the

Microsoft Outlook conduit that came with your Treo 680. If you’re not sure whether this software is installed, reinstall Palm Desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your smartphone.

225


2 Open Microsoft Outlook and correct the wrong entries.

3 On your computer, manually enter any

Calendar info you added to your smartphone since the last time you synchronized.

4 Click HotSync manager in the taskbar and select Custom.

5 Select an application that has both

Calendar and Outlook in its name.

6 Click Change.



9 Repeat steps 4 through 6 to open the

Calendar Change HotSync Action dialog box again.

10 Make sure Synchronize the files is selected and Set as default is checked, and then click OK.

You should now be able to assign time zones to your events without encountering this problem.

If you’re using Palm Desktop software:

1 On your smartphone, press Calendar

.

2 Press Menu .


Preferences.

4 Uncheck the New events use time

zones box (if it’s checked).

5 On your computer, open Palm Desktop software and correct the wrong entries.

6 On your computer, manually enter any

Calendar info you added to your smartphone since the last time you synchronized.

7 Click HotSync manager in the taskbar and select Custom.

8 Select Calendar.

9 Click Change.



12 Repeat steps 7 through 9 to open the

Calendar Change HotSync Action dialog box again.

226


13 Make sure Synchronize the files is selected and Set as default is checked, and then click OK.

You should now be able to assign time zones to your events without encountering this problem.

IMPORTANT

Phone

To avoid this problem in the future, do not assign time zones to your events. Palm Desktop software does not support time zones.

The text of my memos is truncated after I sync

If you use your desktop software to create a memo that is longer than 4,096 characters, the excess characters are truncated when you transfer the memo to your Treo 680.

Signal strength is weak

Become familiar with low coverage areas where you live, commute, work, and play.

Then you will know when to expect signal strength issues. You can check signal strength by looking at the Signal Strength icon in the title bar of the Main tab in the Phone application. The stronger the signal, the more bars that appear. If you are outside a coverage area, no bars appear.

1 If you’re standing, move about ten feet in any direction.

2 If you’re in a building, move near a window. Open any metal blinds.

3 If you’re in a building, move outdoors or to a more open area.

4 If you’re outdoors, move away from large buildings, trees, or electrical wires.

5 If you’re in a vehicle, move your Treo so that it’s close to a window of your vehicle.

My Treo won’t connect to the mobile network

1 Try the suggestions about signal

strength described in Signal strength is weak.

2 Turn off your phone and turn it on again

(see Turning your phone on and off).

3 Remove the SIM card and reinsert it

(see Inserting the SIM card and battery).

227



The other person hears an echo

•

Try decreasing the volume on your Treo to avoid coupling or feedback on the other person’s end. This applies to both the speakerphone and the earpiece.

•

•

Position the earpiece closer to your ear to prevent sound leaking back to the microphone. Keep your hand away from the microphone hole, which is on the bottom right side of the smartphone.

If you’re using the speakerphone feature with your Treo lying on a flat surface, try turning the Treo face down

(screen facing the surface).

I hear my own voice echo

Ask the person on the other end of the call to turn down the volume on his or her phone or to hold the phone closer to his or her ear.

My voice is too quiet on the other end

•

Be sure to place the bottom of the Treo, or the hands-free microphone, close to your mouth.

•

Check the Signal Strength icon in the title bar of the Main tab in the

Phone application. If the signal is weak

(few bars are displayed), try the suggestions about signal strength

described in Signal strength is weak.

I hear static or interference

Check the Signal Strength icon in the title bar of the Main tab in the Phone application. If the signal is weak (few bars are displayed), try the suggestions about

signal strength described in Signal strength is weak.

If you’re using a Bluetooth hands-free

device, see I hear static or interference when using my Bluetooth hands-free device.

My phone seems to turn off by itself

If a system error and reset occur, the Treo

680 automatically turns the phone on if it was on before the reset. However, if the

228


Treo 680 can’t determine if your phone was on before the reset, the phone does not

automatically turn on (see Turning your phone on and off). If the problem persists

and you’re using third-party applications,

see Third-party applications for additional

suggestions.

Hands-free devices

TIP

Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet in optimum environmental conditions.

Performance and range may be affected by physical obstacles, radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors.

My Treo makes or answers calls when it’s in a bag or pocket

Items in your bag or pocket may be pressing the onscreen Answer button or otherwise activating screen items. If this happens, be sure to press Power/End

to turn off the screen before placing your Treo in a bag or pocket. You may also want to disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature during incoming

calls (see Locking your screen).

TIP

To find carrying cases that can help prevent your smartphone from making calls, as well as other useful accessories, visit www.palm.com/treo680gsm.

I can’t make or receive calls using a

Bluetooth hands-free device

Confirm all the following:

•

•

•

The Bluetooth device is compatible with your smartphone. Go to www.palm.com/treo680gsm-support for a list of compatible devices.


Bluetooth . Make sure the

Bluetooth setting is On.

You have already formed a partnership between your Treo 680 and your hands-free device, and that the hands-free device appears in the

Trusted Devices list. (see Connecting to a Bluetooth hands-free device).

229


•

•

Your hands-free device is charged and turned on.

Your Treo is within range of the hands-free device.

If the problem persists, turn the Bluetooth setting Off and then turn it On again. If it still persists, create a new partnership with

the hands-free device (see Connecting to a

Bluetooth hands-free device).

TIP

For best performance, keep your

Bluetooth hands-free device and your phone on the same side of your body.

Some features of my Bluetooth hands-free device don’t work with my

Treo

•

Check the Palm compatibility list at www.palm.com/treo680gsm-support to ensure that your device is compatible.

•

Check the documentation that came with your device or the manufacturer’s website for information specific to your device.

I hear static or interference when using my Bluetooth hands-free device

•

•

•

Try moving your Treo closer to the hands-free device. Audio quality degrades as the distance between your

Treo and hands-free device increases.

The effective range for a device varies between manufacturers.

Confirm that no obstructions, including your body, are between your Treo and your hands-free device.

If the problem persists, turn the

Bluetooth setting Off and then turn it back on again. If it still persists, create a new partnership with the hands-free

device (see Connecting to a Bluetooth hands-free device).

•

Email

For troubleshooting info on the

VersaMail ® application, see the User

Guide for the VersaMail Application on your computer.


Mac: Insert the Palm Installation CD and click the link to the User Guide for

230


the VersaMail Application in the


Messaging

I can’t tell if data services are available

When your phone is on, icons appear in the title bar in the Main tab in the Phone application to indicate whether data services are available and whether a data connection is active. Make sure that either of the following icons appears in the title bar of the Main tab: . If you do not see either of these icons, data services are not available in your current location and you cannot exchange multimedia messages.

I can’t send or receive text messages

•

Make sure your SIM card is inserted

correctly (see Inserting the SIM card and battery) and your phone is turned on

(see Turning your phone on and off).

•

Contact your wireless service provider to verify that your plan includes text messaging services, that these services

•

• have been correctly activated, and that they are available at your location. Your wireless service provider should be able to tell you if text messaging services have been experiencing transmission delays. Delays can also occur between the time that a message is sent and the time it is received.

Verify with the recipient that the receiving device can handle text messages.

If a text message arrives but does not display an alert, perform a soft reset

(see Performing a soft reset).

I can’t send or receive multimedia messages

•

•

Make sure your phone is turned on (see

Turning your phone on and off).

Contact your wireless service provider to verify that your plan includes multimedia messaging services (MMS), that these services have been correctly activated, and that they are available at your location. Your wireless service provider should be able to tell you if multimedia messaging services have been experiencing transmission delays.

231


•

•

•

Delays can also occur between the time that a message is sent and the time it is received.

Make sure that either of the following icons appears in the title bar of the Main tab: . If you do not see either of these icons, data services are not available in your current location and you cannot exchange multimedia messages.

Verify with the recipient that the receiving device can handle multimedia messages.

If a message arrives but does not display an alert, perform a soft reset

(see Performing a soft reset).

Web

see either of these icons, data services are not available in your current location and you cannot connect to the Internet.

My Treo won’t connect to the Internet

Your Treo 680 supports GPRS and EDGE wireless data networks. To connect to the

Internet, you must subscribe to and activate data services with your wireless service provider, and you must be in a location with data coverage.

I can’t tell if data services are available

When your phone is on, icons appear in the title bar in the Main tab in the Phone application to indicate whether data services are available and whether a data connection is active. Make sure that either of the following icons appears in the title bar of the Main tab: . If you do not turn off your phone. Then press and hold the same button to turn it back on again.

2 Press Phone and look for either of the following icons in the title bar of the

Main tab: .

3 If you see these icons, you are in a data coverage area. Try connecting to the

Internet again. If you do not see either of these icons, press Applications , select Prefs following steps.

, and continue with the

4 Select Network.

232


5 Select the Service pick list and select your wireless service provider’s data service.

6 Select Connect.

7 If the connection is successful, go the web browser. If you still can’t make a connection, perform a soft reset (see

Performing a soft reset).

8 If your phone did not turn on automatically after the soft reset, press and hold Power/End to turn on your phone, and try connecting to the

Internet.

9 Contact your wireless service provider to verify the following:

•

Your subscription plan includes high-speed data services.

•

Data services have been activated on your account.

•

Data coverage is available in your location.

•

There are no data service outages in your location.

I can’t access a web page

First, make sure you have Internet access:

Open the web browser and try to view another web page you’ve loaded before. To ensure you’re viewing the page directly

Go, and then select Refresh.

If you can view the other web page after you refresh it, but you still can’t access the page you were originally trying to view, the page may contain elements that are not supported by the web browser. These include Flash, Shockwave, VBScript,

WMLScript, and other plug-ins.

Some websites use a redirector to their true home page. If the web browser on your smartphone can’t follow the redirector, try using a desktop browser to see the landing page of the redirector, and then enter that address in the web browser on your smartphone.

TIP

Your Treo can open your email application when you select an email address on a web page. If nothing happens when you select the link, make sure your email application is already set up.

233


It takes a long time for a web page to load

If it is taking longer than usual to load web pages, you may have traveled from an

EDGE service area to a GPRS service area.

Although GPRS data service is considered a high-speed data service, it seems slow if you are used to EDGE speed.

1 Press Phone and look for either of the following icons in the title bar of the

Main tab to confirm that you have a data connection:

.

2 Try opening a different web page to see if the problem persists.

•

If you can open a different web page, it is likely that the original web site is experiencing problems, and the problem is not related to your Treo.

•

If the problem persists on a different web page, you may have a problem with your connection to your wireless service provider network.

3 To be sure there is not a problem with your connection to your wireless service provider network, press and hold Power/End to turn off your phone. Then press and hold the same button to turn it back on again.

4 Try opening the web page again to see if it loads faster.

An image or map is too small on my screen

The web browser has two modes:

Optimized and Wide Page. Optimized

Mode resizes all images and page elements to fit in a single column on the smartphone screen. Switch to Wide Page

Mode to see the full-size image (see

Viewing a web page).

You may also be able to save the image on your smartphone or an expansion card and then view the image later on your computer.

A secure site refuses to permit a transaction

Some websites don’t support certain browsers for transactions. Please contact the site’s webmaster to make sure the site allows transactions using Blazer™ web browser from your Treo.

234


My Bluetooth DUN connection isn’t working

Check all of the following:

•

•

•

•


Bluetooth . Make sure the

Bluetooth setting is On.

You have already formed a partnership between your Treo 680 and your

computer (see Creating a partnership between your Treo and your computer).

The Bluetooth feature on your computer is turned on.

Your Treo is within 30 feet of your computer.

•

• computer varies between manufacturers.

Confirm that no obstructions, including your body, are between your Treo and your computer.

If the problem persists, create a new partnership with your computer (see

Creating a partnership between your

Treo and your computer).

Camera

TIP

Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet in optimum environmental conditions.

Performance and range may be affected by physical obstacles, radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors.

If the problem persists, try the following:

•

•

Turn the Bluetooth setting Off and then turn it back on again.

Try moving your Treo closer to your computer. The effective range for a

Here are some tips for taking good pictures with the built-in camera:

•

•

•

Clean the camera’s lens with a soft, lint-free cloth.

Take pictures in bright lighting conditions. Low-light images may be grainy, due to the sensitivity of the camera.

Hold the smartphone as still as possible. Try supporting your picture-taking arm against your body or a stationary object (such as a wall).

235


•

•

Keep the subject of the picture still.

Exposure time is longer with lower light levels, so you may see a blur.

For best results, verify that you have the brightest light source coming from behind you, lighting the subject’s face.

Avoid taking indoor pictures with the subject in front of a window or light.

•

Make sure the subject is at least 18 inches away from the camera to ensure good focus.

Remember that when you synchronize your smartphone with your computer, your camera images are stored in the My

Pictures/Palm Photos folder on your hard

drive (see Viewing pictures and videos on your computer).

Making room on your

Treo

Keep in mind that your Treo 680 includes an expansion card slot, and that you can store applications and information on expansion cards (sold separately).

However, you still need free memory on the Treo 680 itself to run applications from an expansion card. For more info on using

expansion cards, see Using expansion cards.

If you store a large number of records or install many third-party applications, the internal memory on your smartphone may fill up. Here are some common ways to clear space:

Email: Messages that have large attachments can quickly consume memory on your Treo. Delete messages with large attachments. If you have hundreds of messages with or without attachments, you may want to delete older messages to make room (see the User Guide for the

VersaMail Application on your computer).


Mac: Insert the Palm Installation CD and click the link to the User Guide for

the VersaMail Application in the


Pictures & Videos: Large images take up a lot of memory. Move images to an expansion card or synchronize them to your computer, and then delete the images

236


from your Treo (see Viewing pictures and videos on your computer).

Music: Music files often consume a lot of memory. Move music files to an expansion card, or delete large files from your Treo.

Messaging: Multimedia content can also consume a lot of memory. Move multimedia content to an expansion card, or delete large files from your Treo (see

Deleting messages).

Internet: If you set a large web browser cache, you may want to use the web browser’s advanced Memory Management settings to clear all recent pages

(see Customizing your web browser settings).

Third-party applications: You can delete infrequently used applications (see

Removing applications) or move them to an

expansion card (see Copying applications between an expansion card and your Treo).

Third-party applications

Some third-party applications can cause conflicts on your Treo 680. For example, third-party applications that were not written with the Treo keyboard and 5-way navigator in mind may cause strange behavior or errors when using the keyboard and 5-way navigator in these applications.

Third-party applications that modify wireless features may require extra troubleshooting.

If you recently installed an application and your device seems to be stuck, try the following:


2 If the problem persists, perform a

system reset (see Performing a system reset).

3 Delete the most recently installed application from your Treo 680 (see

Removing applications).

237


4 If the problem persists, perform another system reset.

5 If possible, synchronize your smartphone with your computer to back up your most recent info.

6 If you’re unable to perform the preceding steps or the problem persists, locate your Backup subfolder on your computer and rename the folder (for example, BackupOld).

Windows: C:\Program

Files\Palm\<device name>

Mac: Mac hard drive> : Applications :

Palm : Users : <device name>

NOTE Can’t find a Palm folder in Program

Files? Then look for a palmOne or

Handspring folder instead. For more info,

see I can’t find my user folder.

file in the original Backup subfolder that you renamed, and sync after each application you install.

10 If the problem recurs, delete the last application you installed and report the problem to its developer.

I can’t exit a game or third-party application return to Applications View.

Getting more help

Contact the author or vendor of the third-party software if you require further assistance.

Error messages

7 Perform a hard reset (see Performing a hard reset).

8 Sync to restore your info in Calendar,

Contacts, Tasks, Memos, and Pictures

& Videos.

9 If the problem is resolved, begin reinstalling your third-party applications one at a time by double-clicking a single

Your Treo 680 is designed to minimize interruptions when a system error occurs.

If your smartphone encounters a system error, it automatically resets itself and resumes functioning as normal. If possible, it even turns the phone back on if it was on before the error occurred.

238


Sometimes you might want to know more about an error. Your Treo 680 uses a special interface to show error messages in greater detail.

1 Press Phone .

2 Enter #*377, and then press Send

.

3 Review the screen with details about the conditions that led up to the most recent automatic reset.

4 Select OK.

NOTE Third-party developers create their own error messages. If you do not understand an error message, please contact the developer of the application for help.

239


240

Where to learn more

Information: Many dialog boxes have a

Tips icon in the upper-right corner.

Select the Tips icon to learn about the tasks you can perform in that dialog box.

Whether you’re on the go or at your computer, there are several ways to learn more about using your Palm smartphone.

®

Treo

™

680

Online support from Palm: For up-to-date downloads, troubleshooting, and support information, go to www.palm.com/treo680gsm-support.

For a quick introduction

Quick Tour: The Quick Tour introduces you to many of the features on your Treo 680.

It is already installed on your Treo, and you can open it any time. Press Applications

, and then select Quick Tour .

If you need more information

Books: Many books on Palm OS ® devices are available in local or online book retailers

(look in the computers section), or visit www.palm.com/treo680gsm.

While using your Treo

On-device User Guide: A copy of this guide is included right on your smartphone.

The on-device guide is specially formatted for your smartphone screen. To view the

Online forums: Consult online user discussion groups to swap Treo information and learn about Treo topics you may find nowhere else. Visit www.palm.com/treo680gsm for details.

on-device guide, press Applications ,

Customer service from your wireless and then select My Treo .

service provider: For questions about your

Tips: Many of the built-in applications include helpful tips for getting the most out of your Treo. To view these tips, open an mobile account or features, contact your wireless service provider.

Options, and then select Tips.

W H E R E T O L E A R N M O R E 241

242 W H E R E T O L E A R N M O R E

Terms

Alt (alternative)

A keyboard key. Enter a letter on the keyboard, and then press Alt to access variations such as international characters and symbols.

Applications View

The screen on your Palm

®

Treo

™

680 smartphone from which you can open all applications.

Auto-off interval

The time of inactivity that passes before the screen on your smartphone turns off.

The wireless features on your smartphone are unaffected by this setting.

Beam

The process of sending or receiving an entry or application using the infrared (IR) port on your Treo.

Bluetooth ® wireless technology

Technology that enables devices such as smartphones, mobile phones, and computers to connect wirelessly to each other so that they can exchange information over short distances. For more info, visit www.bluetooth.com.

CSD (circuit-switched data)

A dial-up Internet connection. You pay for the connection time, not how much information you transfer. Contrast with

GPRS.

Device name

The name associated with your Treo 680 and with the info in your desktop software.

The device name (sometimes called the

username) distinguishes your Treo 680 from all other Palm OS ® devices. When you first synchronize your Treo 680, you are asked to give it a device name. This name appears in the User list in Palm Desktop software. Every Palm OS device that is synchronized with the same computer must have a unique device name.

Dialog box

A set of options and command buttons that is enclosed by a border and that enables you to carry out a specific task.

T E R M S 243

EDGE (Enhanced Data rates for GSM

Evolution)

An enhanced version of GPRS that delivers data speeds that are up to three times faster than standard GPRS connections.


Favorite

A button that provides quick access to a phone number (speed-dial button) or commonly used application (such as Web or Messaging). You can define an unlimited number of favorite buttons in the Phone application.

GPRS (General Packet Radio Service)

A mobile Internet connectivity technology that allows persistent data connections.


HotSync ®

The technology that synchronizes your Treo and your computer with the simple press of a button.

HotSync manager

The computer application that manages the synchronization of your Treo with your computer.

Infrared (IR)

A way of transmitting information using light waves; this is called beaming. The IR port on your Treo enables you to transfer information to other IR devices within a short radius.

Lithium Ion (Li-Ion)

The rechargeable battery technology used in the Treo 680.

MMS (Multimedia Messaging System)

An enhanced form of messaging that enables you to send pictures, videos, animations, sounds, and ringtones almost instantly.

Option key

The keyboard key that enables you to access the alternative feature that appears above the letter on each key.

Palm ® Desktop software

A PIM application for computers that helps you manage your personal information and keep your personal information synchronized with your Treo.

244 T E R M S

Palm OS

The operating system of your Treo 680.

Palm OS is known for its simplicity of use and for the large number of compatible third-party applications that can be added to your smartphone.

Palm™ Quick Install

The component on your Windows computer that enables you to install Palm

OS applications and other information on your Treo.

Partnership

Two Bluetooth devices—for example, your smartphone and a hands-free device—that can connect because each device finds the same passkey on the other device. Once you form a partnership with a device, you don’t need to enter a passkey to connect with that device again. Partnership is also known as paired relationship, pairing, trusted device, and trusted pair on some devices.

Phone

The application on your Treo 680 that enables you to make and receive phone calls.

PIM (personal information manager)

A genre of software that includes applications such as Palm Desktop software, Microsoft Outlook, Lotus Notes, and ACT!. PIMs generally store contacts, schedules, tasks, and memos.

PIN (personal identification number)

The four-digit password assigned to your

SIM card by your wireless service provider.

Turning on the PIN lock secures your wireless account. See also PUK.

PIN2 (personal identification number 2)

A code that protects certain network settings such as call barring or fixed dialing.

PUK (PIN unlock key)

A special extended password assigned to your SIM card. If you enter the wrong PIN more than three times, your SIM card will be blocked and you must call your wireless service provider for the PUK.

Quick key

A letter that you can press and hold to activate a favorite from any tab in the

Phone app. For example, create a speed-dial button for your mother's number and enter the letter M for “Mom”

T E R M S 245

as the Quick Key. Then when you want to call her, go to the Phone app and press and hold M. Your smartphone dials the number.

SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card

The smartcard, inserted in your Treo 680, that contains your mobile account information, such as your phone number and the services to which you subscribe.

Phonebook entries and SMS messages can also be stored on the SIM card.

Slide

A collection of text, pictures, videos, and sounds that are grouped together within a multimedia message created in the

Messaging application. During playback, all the items within a particular slide appear on the same screen. If a multimedia message contains multiple slides, each slide can be viewed separately during playback.

SMS (Short Messaging Service)

The service that exchanges short text messages almost instantly. Text messages are typically sent to a mobile phone number, rather than an email address

(although this too is possible). These messages can usually include up to 160 characters; messages with more than 160 characters are automatically split into several messages. You can send and receive SMS messages while you are on a voice call.

Streaming

Technology that enables you to access media content—for example, watch video or listen to an audio program—directly from the Internet on your smartphone without needing to download a file to save on your smartphone.

User folder

The folder on your computer that contains the information you enter in Palm Desktop software and the information you enter on your smartphone and synchronize with

Palm Desktop software.

246 T E R M S

Regulatory information

FCC Notice

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

CE Declaration of Conformity

Application of Council Directive(s):

89/336/EEC (EMC directive), 99/5/EC (R&TTE directive)

73/23/EEC (Low Voltage Directive)

Standards to which Conformity is Declared:

EN55022

EN301-489

EN300-328

EN55024

Digital Device Emissions (Class B)

Radio Device EMC

Radio Equipment Emissions

Digital Device EMC

EN60950 Product Safety

EN50360/50361 SAR Safety

Manufacturers Name:

Importer Name/Address:

Type of Equipment:

Model Number:

Year of Manufacture:

Palm Inc.

Roy Bedlow

Buckhurst Court

London Road

Wokingham, Berkshire RG40 1PA,

UK

Smartphone

Treo 680

2006

Antenna Care/Unauthorized Modifications

Use only the supplied integral antenna. Unauthorized antenna modifications or attachments could damage the unit and may violate

FCC regulations. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

FCC RF Safety Statement

In order to comply with FCC RF exposure safety guidelines, users

MUST use one of the following types of bodyworn accessories.

1 A Palm

®

brand body-worn accessory that has been tested for

SAR compliance and is intended for use with this product.

2 An accessory that contains NO metal (snaps, clips, etc.) and provides AT LEAST 1.5 cm of separation between the users body and the unit.

Do NOT use the device in a manner such that it is in direct contact with the body (i.e., on the lap or in a breast pocket). Such use will likely exceed FCC RF safety exposure limits See www.fcc.gov/oet/ rfsafety/ for more information on RF exposure safety.

Specific Absorption Rates (SAR) for Wireless

Smartphones

The SAR is a value that corresponds to the relative amount of RF energy absorbed in the head of a user of a wireless handset.

The SAR value of a smartphone is the result of an extensive testing, measuring and calculation process. It does not represent how much

R E G U L A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N 247

RF the smartphone emits. All smartphone models are tested at their highest value in strict laboratory settings. But when in operation, the

SAR of a smartphone can be substantially less than the level reported to the FCC. This is because of a variety of factors including its proximity to a base station antenna, smartphone design and other factors. What is important to remember is that each smartphone meets strict federal guidelines. Variations in SARs do not represent a variation in safety.

All smartphones must meet the federal standard, which incorporates a substantial margin of safety. As stated above, variations in SAR values between different model smartphones do not mean variations in safety. SAR values at or below the federal standard of 1.6 W/kg are considered safe for use by the public.

To view the highest reported (FCC) SAR values of the Palm

®

Treo

™

680 smartphone, visit www.palm.com/38086.

FCC Radiofrequency Emission

This smartphone meets the FCC Radiofrequency Emission

Guidelines and is certified with the FCC as.

FCC ID number: O8F850.

Industry Canada ID number: 3905A-850

More information on the smartphone's SAR can be found from the following FCC Website: https://gullfoss2.fcc.gov/prod/oet/cf/eas/reports/GenericSearch.cfm.

(The following information comes from a consumer information

Website jointly sponsored by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration

(FDA) and the Federal Communications Commission (FCC), entitled

“Cell Phone Facts: Consumer Information on Wireless Phones.” The information reproduced herein is dated July 29, 2003. For further updates, please visit the Website: http://www.fda.gov/cellphones/qa.html.)

What is radiofrequency energy (RF)?

Radiofrequency energy (RF) is another name for radio waves. It is one form of electromagnetic energy that makes up the electromagnetic spectrum. Some of the other forms of energy in the electromagnetic spectrum are gamma rays, x-rays and light. Electromagnetic energy (or electromagnetic radiation) consists of waves of electric and magnetic energy moving together (radiating) through space. The area where these waves are found is called an electromagnetic field.

Radio waves are created due to the movement of electrical charges in antennas. As they are created, these waves radiate away from the antenna. All electromagnetic waves travel at the speed of light. The major differences between the different types of waves are the distances covered by one cycle of the wave and the number of waves that pass a certain point during a set time period. The wavelength is the distance covered by one cycle of a wave. The frequency is the number of waves passing a given point in one second. For any electromagnetic wave, the wavelength multiplied by the frequency equals the speed of light. The frequency of an RF signal is usually expressed in units called hertz (Hz). One Hz equals one wave per second. One kilohertz (kHz) equals one thousand waves per second, one megahertz (MHz) equals one million waves per second, and one gigahertz (GHz) equals one billion waves per second.

RF energy includes waves with frequencies ranging from about 3000 waves per second (3 kHz) to 300 billion waves per second (300 GHz).

Microwaves are a subset of radio waves that have frequencies ranging from around 300 million waves per second (300 MHz) to three billion waves per second (3 GHz).

How is radiofrequency energy used?

Probably the most important use of RF energy is for telecommunications. Radio and TV broadcasting, wireless phones, pagers, cordless phones, police and fire department radios, point-to-point links and satellite communications all rely on RF energy.

Other uses of RF energy include microwave ovens, radar, industrial heaters and sealers, and medical treatments. RF energy, especially at microwave frequencies, can heat water. Since most food has a high water content, microwaves can cook food quickly. Radar relies on RF energy to track cars and airplanes as well as for military applications.

Industrial heaters and sealers use RF energy to mold plastic materials, glue wood products, seal leather items such as shoes and pocketbooks, and process food. Medical uses of RF energy include pacemaker monitoring and programming.

How is radiofrequency radiation measured?

RF waves and RF fields have both electrical and magnetic components. It is often convenient to express the strength of the RF field in terms of each component. For example, the unit “volts per meter” (V/m) is used to measure the electric field strength, and the unit “amperes per meter” (A/m) is used to express the magnetic field strength. Another common way to characterize an RF field is by means of the power

248 R E G U L A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N

density. Power density is defined as power per unit area. For example, power density can be expressed in terms of milliwatts (one thousandth of a watt) per square centimeter (mW/cm2) or microwatts

(one millionth of a watt) per square centimeter (µW/cm2).

The quantity used to measure how much RF energy is actually absorbed by the body is called the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR.

The SAR is a measure of the rate of absorption of RF energy. It is usually expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg) or milliwatts per gram (mW/g).

What biological effects can be caused by RF energy?

The biological effects of radiofrequency energy should not be confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic energy.

Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found in X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues. Ionization is a process where electrons are stripped away from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the genetic material. Ionization only occurs with very high levels of electromagnetic energy such as X-rays and gamma rays. Often the term radiation is used when discussing ionizing radiation (such as that associated with nuclear power plants).

The energy levels associated with radiofrequency energy, including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great enough to cause the ionization of atoms and molecules. Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation. Other types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light, infrared radiation (heat) and other forms of electromagnetic radiation with relatively low frequencies.

Large amounts of RF energy can heat tissue. This can damage tissues and increase body temperatures. Two areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little blood flow in them to carry away excess heat.

The amount of RF radiation routinely encountered by the general public is too low to produce significant heating or increased body temperature. Still, some people have questions about the possible health effects of low levels of RF energy. It is generally agreed that further research is needed to determine what effects actually occur and whether they are dangerous to people. In the meantime, standards-setting organizations and government agencies are continuing to monitor the latest scientific findings to determine whether changes in safety limits are needed to protect human health.

FDA, EPA and other US government agencies responsible for public health and safety have worked together and in connection with WHO to monitor developments and identify research needs related to RF biological effects.

What levels of RF energy are considered safe?

Various organizations and countries have developed standards for exposure to radiofrequency energy. These standards recommend safe levels of exposure for both the general public and for workers. In the United

States, the FCC has used safety guidelines for RF environmental exposure since 1985.

The FCC guidelines for human exposure to RF electromagnetic fields are derived from the recommendations of two expert organizations, the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements

(NCRP) and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

(IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry, government, and academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF energy.

Many countries in Europe and elsewhere use exposure guidelines developed by the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation

Protection (ICNIRP). The ICNIRP safety limits are generally similar to those of the NCRP and IEEE, with a few exceptions. For example,

ICNIRP recommends different exposure levels in the lower and upper frequency ranges and for localized exposure from certain products such as hand-held wireless telephones. Currently, the World Health

Organization is working to provide a framework for international harmonization of RF safety standards.

The NCRP, IEEE, and ICNIRP all have identified a whole-body Specific

Absorption Rate (SAR) value of 4 watts per kilogram (4 W/kg) as a threshold level of exposure at which harmful biological effects may occur. Exposure guidelines in terms of field strength, power density and localized SAR were then derived from this threshold value. In addition, the NCRP, IEEE, and ICNIRP guidelines vary depending on the frequency of the RF exposure. This is due to the finding that whole-body human absorption of RF energy varies with the frequency of the RF signal. The most restrictive limits on whole-body exposure are in the frequency range of 30-300 MHz where the


human body absorbs RF energy most efficiently. For products that only expose part of the body, such as wireless phones, exposure limits in terms of SAR only are specified.

The exposure limits used by the FCC are expressed in terms of SAR, electric and magnetic field strength, and power density for transmitters operating at frequencies from 300 kHz to 100 GHz. The specific values can be found in two FCC bulletins, OET Bulletins 56 and 65: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/info/documents/bulletins/#56; http://www.fcc.gov/oet/info/documents/bulletins/#65.

Why has the FCC adopted guidelines for RF exposure?

The FCC authorizes and licenses products, transmitters, and facilities that generate RF and microwave radiation. It has jurisdiction over all transmitting services in the U.S. except those specifically operated by the Federal Government. While the FCC does not have the expertise to determine radiation exposure guidelines on its own, it does have the expertise and authority to recognize and adopt technically sound standards promulgated by other expert agencies and organizations, and has done so. (Our joint efforts with the FDA in developing this website is illustrative of the kind of inter-agency efforts and consultation we engage in regarding this health and safety issue.)

Under the National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 (NEPA), the FCC has certain responsibilities to consider whether its actions will significantly affect the quality of the human environment. Therefore,

FCC approval and licensing of transmitters and facilities must be evaluated for significant impact on the environment. Human exposure to RF radiation emitted by FCC-regulated transmitters is one of several factors that must be considered in such environmental evaluations. In 1996, the FCC revised its guidelines for RF exposure as a result of a multi-year proceeding and as required by the

Telecommunications Act of 1996.

Radio and television broadcast stations, satellite-earth stations, experimental radio stations and certain wireless communication facilities are required to undergo routine evaluation for RF compliance when they submit an application to the FCC for construction or modification of a transmitting facility or renewal of a license. Failure to comply with the FCC's RF exposure guidelines could lead to the preparation of a formal Environmental Assessment, possible

Environmental Impact Statement and eventual rejection of an application. Technical guidelines for evaluating compliance with the

FCC.

RF safety requirements can be found in the FCC's OET Bulletin 65: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/info/documents/bulletins/#65.

Low-powered, intermittent, or inaccessible RF transmitters and facilities are normally excluded from the requirement for routine evaluation for RF exposure. These exclusions are based on standard calculations and measurement data indicating that a transmitting station or equipment operating under the conditions prescribed is unlikely to cause exposures in excess of the guidelines under normal conditions of use. Such exclusions are not exclusions from compliance, but, rather, exclusions from routine evaluation. The

FCC's policies on RF exposure and categorical exclusion can be found in Section 1.1307(b) of the FCC's Rules and Regulations [(47 CFR

1.1307(b)].

How can I obtain the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) value for my wireless phone?

The FCC requires that wireless phones sold in the United States demonstrate compliance with human exposure limits adopted by the FCC in 1996. The relative amount of RF energy absorbed in the head of a wireless telephone-user is given by the

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR), as explained above. The FCC requires wireless phones to comply with a safety limit of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg) in terms of SAR.

Information on SAR for a specific phone model can be obtained for many recently manufactured phones using the FCC identification (ID) number for that model. The FCC ID number is usually printed somewhere on the case of the phone. Sometimes it may be necessary to remove the battery pack to find the number. Once you have the ID number, go to the following Web address: www.fcc.gov/ oet/fccid. On this page, you will see instructions for entering the FCC

ID number. Type the FCC ID number exactly as requested (the

Grantee Code is the first three characters, the Equipment Product

Code is the rest of the FCC ID number). Then click on “Start Search.”

The “Grant of Equipment Authorization” for your telephone should appear. Read through the grant for the section on “SAR Compliance,”

“Certification of Compliance with FCC Rules for RF Exposure” or similar language. This section should contain the value(s) for typical or maximum SAR for your phone.

Phones and other products authorized since June 2, 2000, should have the maximum SAR levels noted directly on the “Grant of

Equipment Authorization.” For phones and products authorized between about mid-1998 and June 2000, detailed information on


SAR levels is typically found in the exhibits associated with the grant.

Once a grant is accessed, the exhibits can be viewed by clicking on

“View Exhibit.” Grants authorized prior to 1998 are not part of the electronic database but, rather, have been documented in the form of paper records.

The FCC database does not list phones by model number. However, consumers may find SAR information from other sources as well.

Some wireless phone manufacturers make SAR information available on their own Web sites. In addition, some non-government websites provide SARs for specific models of wireless phones. However, the

FCC has not reviewed these sites and makes no guarantees of their accuracy. Finally, phones certified by the Cellular Telecommunications and Internet Association (CTIA) are required to provide SAR information to consumers in the instructional materials that come with the phones.

Do hands-free kits for wireless phones reduce risks from exposure to RF emissions?

Since there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from wireless phones, there is no reason to believe that hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used with wireless phones for convenience and comfort. These systems reduce the absorption of RF energy in the head because the phone, which is the source of the RF emissions, will not be placed against the head. On the other hand, if the phone is mounted against the waist or other part of the body during use, then that part of the body will absorb more RF energy. Wireless phones marketed in the

U.S. are required to meet safety requirements regardless of whether they are used against the head or against the body. Either configuration should result in compliance with the safety limit.

Do wireless phone accessories that claim to shield the head from

RF radiation work?

Since there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from wireless phones, there is no reason to believe that accessories that claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield the user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone. Studies have shown that these products generally do not work as advertised.

Unlike “hand-free” kits, these so-called “shields” may interfere with proper operation of the phone. The phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate, leading to an increase in RF absorption. In

February 2002, the Federal trade Commission (FTC) charged two companies that sold devices that claimed to protect wireless phone users from radiation with making false and unsubstantiated claims.

According to FTC, these defendants lacked a reasonable basis to substantiate their claim.

What are wireless telephone base stations?

Fixed antennas used for wireless telecommunications are referred to as cellular base stations, cell stations, PCS (“Personal Communications Service”) stations or telephone transmission towers. These base stations consist of antennas and electronic equipment. Because the antennas need to be high in the air, they are often located on towers, poles, water tanks, or rooftops. Typical heights for freestanding base station towers are 50-200 feet.

Some base stations use antennas that look like poles, 10 to 15 feet in length, that are referred to as “omni-directional” antennas. These types of antennas are usually found in rural areas. In urban and suburban areas, wireless providers now more commonly use panel or sector antennas for their base stations. These antennas consist of rectangular panels, about 1 by 4 feet in dimension. The antennas are usually arranged in three groups of three antennas each. One antenna in each group is used to transmit signals to wireless phones, and the other two antennas in each group are used to receive signals from wireless phones.

At any base station site, the amount of RF energy produced depends on the number of radio channels (transmitters) per antenna and the power of each transmitter. Typically, 21 channels per antenna sector are available. For a typical cell site using sector antennas, each of the three transmitting antennas could be connected to up to 21 transmitters for a total of 63 transmitters. However, it is unlikely that all of the transmitters would be transmitting at the same time. When omni-directional antennas are used, a cellular base station could theoretically use up to 96 transmitters, but this would be very unusual, and, once again, it is unlikely that all transmitters would be in operation simultaneously. Base stations used for PCS communications generally require fewer transmitters than those used for cellular radio transmissions, since PCS carriers usually have a higher density of base station antenna sites.

Are wireless telephone base stations safe?

The electromagnetic

RF signals transmitted from base station antennas stations travel toward the horizon in relatively narrow paths. For example, the radiation pattern for an antenna array mounted on a tower can be


likened to a thin pancake centered around the antenna system. The individual pattern for a single array of sector antennas is wedge-shaped, like a piece of pie. As with all forms of electromagnetic energy, the power decreases rapidly as one moves away from the antenna. Therefore, RF exposure on the ground is much less than exposure very close to the antenna and in the path of the transmitted radio signal. In fact, ground-level exposure from such antennas is typically thousands of times less than the exposure levels recommended as safe by expert organizations. So exposure to nearby residents would be well within safety margins.

Cellular and PCS base stations in the United States are required to comply with limits for exposure recommended by expert organizations and endorsed by government agencies responsible for health and safety. Measurements made near cellular and PCS base station antennas mounted on towers have confirmed that ground-level exposures are typically thousands of times less than the exposure limits adopted by the FCC. In fact, in order to be exposed to levels at or near the FCC limits for cellular or PCS frequencies an individual would essentially have to remain in the main transmitted radio signal (at the height of the antenna) and within a few feet from the antenna. This is, of course, very unlikely to occur.

When cellular and PCS antennas are mounted on rooftops, RF levels on that roof or on others near by would probably be greater than those typically encountered on the ground. However, exposure levels approaching or exceeding safety guidelines should be encountered only very close to or directly in front of the antennas. In addition, for sector-type antennas, typically used for such rooftop base stations, RF levels to the side and in back of these antennas are insignificant.

General guidelines on antenna installations and circumstances that might give rise to a concern about a facility's conformance with FCC regulations can be found in A Local Government Official's Guide to

Transmitting Antenna RF Emission Safety: Rules, Procedures, and

Practical Guidance. This Guide can be accessed at: http:// www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety.

Who regulates exposure to radiation from microwave ovens, television sets and computer monitors?

The Food and Drug

Administration is responsible for protecting the public from harmful radiation emissions from these consumer products.

Does the FCC routinely monitor radiofrequency radiation from antennas?

The FCC does not have the resources or the personnel to routinely monitor the emissions for all the thousands of transmitters that are subject to FCC jurisdiction. However, the FCC does have measurement instrumentation for evaluating RF levels in areas that may be accessible to the public or to workers. If there is evidence for potential non-compliance with FCC exposure guidelines for a FCC-regulated facility, staff from the FCC's Office of Engineering and Technology or the FCC Enforcement Bureau can conduct an investigation, and, if appropriate, perform actual measurements.

Circumstances that could give rise to a concern about a facility's conformance with FCC regulations can be found in A Local

Government Official's Guide to Transmitting Antenna RF Emission

Safety: Rules, Procedures, and Practical Guidance. This Guide can be accessed at: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety. Potential exposure problems should be brought to the FCC's attention by contacting the

FCC RF Safety Program at: 202-418-2464 or by email: [email protected].

Does the FCC maintain a database that includes information on the location and technical parameters of all the transmitting towers it regulates?

Each of the FCC Bureaus maintains its own licensing database system for the service(s) it regulates (e.g., television, cellular service, satellite earth stations.) The FCC issues two types of licenses: site specific and market based. In the case of site specific licensed facilities, technical operating information is collected from the licensee as part of the licensing process. However, in the case of market based licensing (e.g., PCS, cellular), the licensee is granted the authority to operate a radio communications system in a geographic area using as many facilities as are required, and the licensee is not required to provide the FCC with specific location and operating parameters of these facilities.

Information on site specific licensed facilities can be found in the

“General Menu Reports” (GenMen) at http://gullfoss2.fcc.gov/cgi-bin/ ws.exe/genmen/index.hts.

The various FCC Bureaus also publish on at least a weekly basis, bulk extracts of their licensing databases. Each licensing database has its own unique file structure. These extracts consist of multiple, very large files. The FCC's Office of Engineering and Technology (OET) maintains an index to these databases at http://www.fcc.gov/oet/info/ database/fadb.html. Entry points into the various databases include frequency, state/county, latitude/longitude, call-sign and licensee name. For further information on the Commission's existing


databases, you can contact Donald Campbell at [email protected] or

202-418-2405.

Can local and state governmental bodies establish limits for RF exposure?

Although some local and state governments have enacted rules and regulations about human exposure to RF energy in the past, the Telecommunications Act of 1996 requires the Federal

Government to control human exposure to RF emissions. In particular, Section 704 of the Act states that, “No State or local government or instrumentality thereof may regulate the placement, construction, and modification of personal wireless service facilities on the basis of the environmental effects of radio frequency emissions to the extent that such facilities comply with the

Commission's regulations concerning such emissions.” Further information on federal authority and FCC policy is available in a fact sheet from the FCC's Wireless Telecommunications Bureau at www.fcc.gov/wtb.

Do wireless phones pose a health hazard?

The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using wireless phones. There is no proof, however, that wireless phones are absolutely safe. Wireless phones emit low levels of radiofrequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used.

They also emit very low levels of RF when in the stand-by mode.

Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low level RF exposures have not found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects may occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. In some cases, other researchers have had difficulty in reproducing those studies, or in determining the reasons for inconsistent results.

What is FDA's role concerning the safety of wireless phones?

Under the law, FDA does not review the safety of radiation-emitting consumer products such as wireless phones before they can be sold, as it does with new drugs or medical devices. However, the agency has authority to take action if wireless phones are shown to emit radiofrequency energy (RF) at a level that is hazardous to the user. In such a case, FDA could require the manufacturers of wireless phones to notify users of the health hazard and to repair, replace or recall the phones so that the hazard no longer exists.

Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory actions, FDA has urged the wireless phone industry to take a number of steps, including the following:

• Support needed research into possible biological effects of RF of the type emitted by wireless phones;

• Design wireless phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user that is not necessary for device function; and

• Cooperate in providing users of wireless phones with the best possible information on possible effects of wireless phone use on human health

FDA belongs to an interagency working group of the federal agencies that have responsibility for different aspects of RF safety to ensure coordinated efforts at the federal level. The following agencies belong to this working group:

• National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health

• Environmental Protection Agency

• Federal Communications Commission

• Occupational Safety and Health Administration

• National Telecommunications and Information Administration

The National Institutes of Health participates in some interagency working group activities, as well.

FDA shares regulatory responsibilities for wireless phones with the

Federal Communications Commission (FCC). All phones that are sold in the United States must comply with FCC safety guidelines that limit RF exposure. FCC relies on FDA and other health agencies for safety questions about wireless phones.

FCC also regulates the base stations that the wireless phone networks rely upon. While these base stations operate at higher power than do the wireless phones themselves, the RF exposures that people get from these base stations are typically thousands of times lower than those they can get from wireless phones. Base stations are thus not the primary subject of the safety questions discussed in this document.

What kinds of phones are the subject of this update?

The term

“wireless phone” refers here to hand-held wireless phones with


built-in antennas, often called “cell,” “mobile,” or “PCS” phones.

These types of wireless phones can expose the user to measurable radiofrequency energy (RF) because of the short distance between the phone and the user's head. These RF exposures are limited by

Federal Communications Commission safety guidelines that were developed with the advice of FDA and other federal health and safety agencies. When the phone is located at greater distances from the user, the exposure to RF is drastically lower because a person's RF exposure decreases rapidly with increasing distance from the source.

The so-called “cordless phones,” which have a base unit connected to the telephone wiring in a house, typically operate at far lower power levels, and thus produce RF exposures well within the FCC's compliance limits.

What are the results of the research done already?

The research done thus far has produced conflicting results, and many studies have suffered from flaws in their research methods. Animal experiments investigating the effects of radiofrequency energy (RF) exposures characteristic of wireless phones have yielded conflicting results that often cannot be repeated in other laboratories. A few animal studies, however, have suggested that low levels of RF could accelerate the development of cancer in laboratory animals.

However, many of the studies that showed increased tumor development used animals that had been genetically engineered or treated with cancer-causing chemicals so as to be pre-disposed to develop cancer in the absence of RF exposure. Other studies exposed the animals to RF for up to 22 hours per day. These conditions are not similar to the conditions under which people use wireless phones, so we don't know with certainty what the results of such studies mean for human health.

Three large epidemiology studies have been published since

December 2000. Between them, the studies investigated any possible association between the use of wireless phones and primary brain cancer, glioma, meningioma, or acoustic neuroma, tumors of the brain or salivary gland, leukemia, or other cancers.

None of the studies demonstrated the existence of any harmful health effects from wireless phone RF exposures. However, none of the studies can answer questions about long-term exposures, since the average period of phone use in these studies was around three years.

What research is needed to decide whether RF exposure from wireless phones poses a health risk?

A combination of laboratory studies and epidemiological studies of people actually using wireless phones would provide some of the data that are needed. Lifetime animal exposure studies could be completed in a few years.

However, very large numbers of animals would be needed to provide reliable proof of a cancer promoting effect if one exists.

Epidemiological studies can provide data that is directly applicable to human populations, but 10 or more years' follow-up may be needed to provide answers about some health effects, such as cancer. This is because the interval between the time of exposure to a cancer-causing agent and the time tumors develop—if they do—may be many, many years. The interpretation of epidemiological studies is hampered by difficulties in measuring actual RF exposure during day-to-day use of wireless phones. Many factors affect this measurement, such as the angle at which the phone is held, or which model of phone is used.

What is FDA doing to find out more about the possible health effects of wireless phone RF?

FDA is working with the U.S.

National Toxicology Program and with groups of investigators around the world to ensure that high priority animal studies are conducted to address important questions about the effects of exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF).

FDA has been a leading participant in the World Health Organization

International Electromagnetic Fields (EMF) Project since its inception in 1996. An influential result of this work has been the development of a detailed agenda of research needs that has driven the establishment of new research programs around the world. The

Project has also helped develop a series of public information documents on EMF issues.

FDA and the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association

(CTIA) have a formal Cooperative Research and Development

Agreement (CRADA) to do research on wireless phone safety. FDA provides the scientific oversight, obtaining input from experts in government, industry, and academic organizations. CTIA-funded research is conducted through contracts to independent investigators. The initial research will include both laboratory studies and studies of wireless phone users. The CRADA will also include a broad assessment of additional research needs in the context of the latest research developments around the world.


What steps can I take to reduce my exposure to radiofrequency energy from my wireless phone?

If there is a risk from these products--and at this point we do not know that there is--it is probably very small. But if you are concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take a few simple steps to minimize your exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF). Since time is a key factor in how much exposure a person receives, reducing the amount of time spent using a wireless phone will reduce RF exposure.

If you must conduct extended conversations by wireless phone every day, you could place more distance between your body and the source of the RF, since the exposure level drops off dramatically with distance. For example, you could use a headset and carry the wireless phone away from your body or use a wireless phone connected to a remote antenna.

Again, the scientific data do not demonstrate that wireless phones are harmful. But if you are concerned about the RF exposure from these products, you can use measures like those described above to reduce your RF exposure from wireless phone use.

What about children using wireless phones?

The scientific evidence does not show a danger to users of wireless phones, including children and teenagers. If you want to take steps to lower exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF), the measures described above would apply to children and teenagers using wireless phones.

Reducing the time of wireless phone use and increasing the distance between the user and the RF source will reduce RF exposure.

Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised that children be discouraged from using wireless phones at all. For example, the government in the United Kingdom distributed leaflets containing such a recommendation in December 2000. They noted that no evidence exists that using a wireless phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit wireless phone use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists.

What about wireless phone interference with medical equipment?

Radiofrequency energy (RF) from wireless phones can interact with some electronic devices. For this reason, FDA helped develop a detailed test method to measure electromagnetic interference (EMI) of implanted cardiac pacemakers and defibrillators from wireless telephones. This test method is now part of a standard sponsored by the Association for the Advancement of Medical instrumentation (AAMI). The final draft, a joint effort by FDA, medical device manufacturers, and many other groups, was completed in late

2000. This standard will allow manufacturers to ensure that cardiac pacemakers and defibrillators are safe from wireless phone EMI.

FDA has tested hearing aids for interference from handheld wireless phones and helped develop a voluntary standard sponsored by the

Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). This standard specifies test methods and performance requirements for hearing aids and wireless phones so that no interference occurs when a person uses a “compatible” phone and a “compatible” hearing aid at the same time. This standard was approved by the IEEE in 2000.

FDA continues to monitor the use of wireless phones for possible interactions with other medical devices. Should harmful interference be found to occur, FDA will conduct testing to assess the interference and work to resolve the problem.

Which other federal agencies have responsibilities related to potential RF health effects?

Certain agencies in the Federal

Government have been involved in monitoring, researching or regulating issues related to human exposure to RF radiation. These agencies include the Food and Drug Administration (FDA), the

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the Occupational Safety and

Health Administration (OSHA), the National Institute for Occupational

Safety and Health (NIOSH), the National Telecommunications and

Information Administration (NTIA) and the Department of Defense

(DOD).

By authority of the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of

1968, the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the

FDA develops performance standards for the emission of radiation from electronic products including X-ray equipment, other medical devices, television sets, microwave ovens, laser products and sunlamps. The CDRH established a product performance standard for microwave ovens in 1971 limiting the amount of RF leakage from ovens. However, the CDRH has not adopted performance standards for other RF-emitting products. The FDA is, however, the lead federal health agency in monitoring the latest research developments and advising other agencies with respect to the safety of RF-emitting products used by the public, such as cellular and PCS phones.


The FDA's microwave oven standard is an emission standard (as opposed to an exposure standard) that allows specific levels of microwave leakage (measured at five centimeters from the oven surface). The standard also requires ovens to have two independent interlock systems that prevent the oven from generating microwaves the moment that the latch is released or the door of the oven is opened. The FDA has stated that ovens that meet its standards and are used according to the manufacturer's recommendations are safe for consumer and industrial use. More information is available from: www.fda.gov/cdrh.

The EPA has, in the past, considered developing federal guidelines for public exposure to RF radiation. However, EPA activities related to RF safety and health are presently limited to advisory functions. For example, the EPA now chairs an Inter-agency Radiofrequency

Working Group, which coordinates RF health-related activities among the various federal agencies with health or regulatory responsibilities in this area.

OSHA is responsible for protecting workers from exposure to hazardous chemical and physical agents. In 1971, OSHA issued a protection guide for exposure of workers to RF radiation [29 CFR

1910.97]. However, this guide was later ruled to be only advisory and not mandatory. Moreover, it was based on an earlier RF exposure standard that has now been revised. At the present time, OSHA uses the IEEE and/or FCC exposure guidelines for enforcement purposes under OSHA's “general duty clause” (for more information see: http://www.osha-slc.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html.

NIOSH is part of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services.

It conducts research and investigations into issues related to occupational exposure to chemical and physical agents. NIOSH has, in the past, undertaken to develop RF exposure guidelines for workers, but final guidelines were never adopted by the agency.

NIOSH conducts safety-related RF studies through its Physical

Agents Effects Branch in Cincinnati, Ohio.

The NTIA is an agency of the U.S. Department of Commerce and is responsible for authorizing Federal Government use of the RF electromagnetic spectrum. Like the FCC, the NTIA also has NEPA responsibilities and has considered adopting guidelines for evaluating

RF exposure from U.S. Government transmitters such as radar and military facilities.

The Department of Defense (DOD) has conducted research on the biological effects of RF energy for a number of years. This research is now conducted primarily at the U.S. Air Force Research Laboratory located at Brooks Air Force Base, Texas. The DOD Web site for RF biological effects information is listed with other sites in conjunction with a question on other sources of information, below.

Who funds and carries out research on the biological effects of

RF energy?

Research into possible biological effects of RF energy is carried out in laboratories in the United States and around the world. In the U.S., most research has been funded by the

Department of Defense, due to the extensive military use of RF equipment such as radar and high-powered radio transmitters. In addition, some federal agencies responsible for health and safety, such as the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and the U.S.

Food and Drug Administration (FDA), have sponsored and conducted research in this area. At the present time, most of the non-military research on biological effects of RF energy in the U.S. is being funded by industry organizations. More research is being carried out overseas, particularly in Europe.

In 1996, the World Health Organization (WHO) established the

International EMF Project to review the scientific literature and work towards resolution of health concerns over the use of RF technology.

WHO maintains a Web site that provides extensive information on this project and about RF biological effects and research

(www.who.ch/peh-emf).

FDA, EPA and other US government agencies responsible for public health and safety have worked together and in connection with WHO to monitor developments and identify research needs related to RF biological effects.

How does FCC audit cell phone RF?

After FCC grants permission for a particular cellular telephone to be marketed, FCC will occasionally conduct “post-grant” testing to determine whether production versions of the phone are being produced to conform with

FCC regulatory requirements. The manufacturer of a cell phone that does not meet FCC's regulatory requirements may be required to remove the cell phone from use and to refund the purchase price or provide a replacement phone, and may be subject to civil or criminal penalties. In addition, if the cell phone presents a risk of injury to the user, FDA may also take regulatory action. The most important post-grant test, from a consumer's perspective, is testing of the RF


emissions of the phone. FCC measures the Specific Absorption Rate

(SAR) of the phone, following a very rigorous testing protocol. As is true for nearly any scientific measurement, there is a possibility that the test measurement may be less than or greater than the actual RF emitted by the phone. This difference between the RF test measurement and actual RF emission is because test measurements are limited by instrument accuracy, because test measurement and actual use environments are different, and other variable factors. This inherent variability is known as “measurement uncertainty.” When

FCC conducts post-grant testing of a cell phone, FCC takes into account any measurement uncertainty to when determining whether regulatory action is appropriate. This approach ensures that when FCC takes regulatory action, it will have a sound, defensible scientific basis.

FDA scientific staff reviewed the methodology used by FCC to measure cell phone RF, and agreed it is an acceptable approach, given our current understanding of the risks presented by cellular phone RF emissions. RF emissions from cellular phones have not been shown to present a risk of injury to the user when the measured SAR is less than the safety limits set by FCC (an SAR of 1.6 w/kg). Even in a case where the maximum measurement uncertainty permitted by current measurement standards was added to the maximum permissible SAR, the resulting SAR value would be well below any level known to produce an acute effect. Consequently,

FCC's approach with measurement uncertainty will not result in consumers being exposed to any known risk from the RF emitted by cellular telephones.

FDA will continue to monitor studies and literature reports concerning acute effects of cell phone RF, and concerning chronic effects of long-term exposure to cellular telephone RF (that is, the risks from using a cell phone for many years). If new information leads FDA to believe that a change to FCC's measurement policy may be appropriate, FDA will contact FCC and both agencies will work together to develop a mutually-acceptable approach.

Static Electricity, ESD, and Your Palm ® Device

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic devices if discharged into the device, so you should take steps to avoid such an occurrence.

Description of ESD Static electricity is an electrical charge caused by the buildup of excess electrons on the surface of a material. To most people, static electricity and ESD are nothing more than annoyances.

For example, after walking over a carpet while scuffing your feet, building up electrons on your body, you may get a shock—the discharge event—when you touch a metal doorknob. This little shock discharges the built-up static electricity.

ESD-susceptible equipment Even a small amount of ESD can harm circuitry, so when working with electronic devices, take measures to help protect your electronic devices, including your

Palm ® device, from ESD harm. While Palm has built protections against ESD into its products, ESD unfortunately exists and, unless neutralized, could build up to levels that could harm your equipment.

Any electronic device that contains an external entry point for plugging in anything from cables to docking stations is susceptible to entry of ESD. Devices that you carry with you, such as your Palm device, build up ESD in a unique way because the static electricity that may have built up on your body is automatically passed to the device. Then, when the device is connected to another device such as a docking station, a discharge event can occur.

Precautions against ESD Make sure to discharge any built-up static electricity from yourself and your electronic devices before touching an electronic device or connecting one device to another.

The recommendation from Palm is that you take this precaution before connecting your Palm device to your computer, placing a device in a cradle, or connecting it to any other device. You can do this in many ways, including the following:

• Ground yourself when you’re holding your device by simultaneously touching a metal surface that is at earth ground.

For example, if your computer has a metal case and is plugged into a standard three-prong grounded outlet, touching the case should discharge the ESD on your body.

• Increase the relative humidity of your environment.

• Install ESD-specific prevention items, such as grounding mats.

Conditions that enhance ESD occurrences Conditions that can contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the environment include the following:

• Low relative humidity.


• Material type. (The type of material gathering the charge. For example, synthetics are more prone to static buildup than natural fibers like cotton.)

• The rapidity with which you touch, connect, or disconnect electronic devices.

While you should always take appropriate precautions to discharge static electricity, if you are in an environment where you notice ESD events, you may want to take extra precautions to protect your electronic equipment against ESD.

Precaution against hearing loss Protect your hearing. Listening to this device at full volume for a long period of time can damage your hearing.

A pleine puissance, l'écoute prolongée du baladeur peut endommager l'oreille de l'utilisateur. Consultez notre site web www.palm.com/fr pour plus d'informations.

Waste disposal Please recycle appropriately. For appropriate recycling and disposal instructions please visit: www.palm.com/ environment.

Précautions d'usage de votre téléphone mobile

Le taux de DAS(1) (Débit d’Absorption Spécifique) de votre Treo 680 smartphone est 0,655 w/kg

Conseils d'utilisation pour réduire le niveau d'exposition aux

rayonnements : Utiliser le plus souvent possible les kits piétons

(oreillettes), notamment en cas d'usage fréquent ou prolongé du téléphone mobile Ils apportent en outre un plus grand confort d’utilisation.

Eloigner le téléphone mobile de certaines zones sensibles telles que le ventre chez les femmes enceintes ou le bas-ventre chez les adolescents, plus particulièrement lors d’une communication.

Utiliser votre téléphone mobile dans de bonnes conditions de réception. Celle-ci est indiquée sur l’écran de votre téléphone par la matérialisation de barrettes. 3 ou 4 barrettes, la réception est de bonne qualité pour passer vos communications. Ce n'est pas toujours le cas dans certaines zones ou situations, notamment les parking souterrains, les ascenseurs, en train ou en voiture ou tout simplement dans un secteur mal couvert par le réseau.

Mesures touchant à la sécurité : Dans certains lieux ou situations, tels que les avions, les hôpitaux, les stations-service et les garages professionnels, l'usage du téléphone est interdit. Il est donc impératif de respecter strictement les consignes de sécurité propres à chacune de ces situations et d’éteindre votre téléphone lorsque cela est requis.

Par ailleurs pour éviter les risques d’interférences, les personnes porteuses d’implants électroniques (stimulateurs cardiaques, pompes à insuline, neurostimulateurs..) doivent conserver une distance de 15 cm entre le mobile et l’implant et ne l’utiliser que du côté opposé au côté où celui-ci est situé.

Téléphoner en conduisant, même avec des équipements qui ne sont pas interdits par la réglementation, est dangereux car il augmente potentiellement le risque d’accident provenant de la distraction créée par la conversation elle même. Aussi, est-il recommandé de ne jamais téléphoner en conduisant et de considérer que l’utilisation d’un kit mains-libres n’est pas une solution.

(1) Valeur DAS la plus élevée pour ce modèle de téléphone et pour une utilisation à l’oreille, communiquée par le constructeur. Le DAS, exprimé en w/kg, quantifie le niveau d’exposition aux ondes

électromagnétiques et permet de vérifier la conformité des mobiles à la réglementation française et européenne qui impose que celui-ci soit inférieur à 2w/kg.


Specifications

Radio

Phone features

Processor technology

Expansion

Battery

Palm OS

Camera

Size

Weight

®

version

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

GSM 850/900/1800/1900 quad band world phone

GPRS class 10, class B

EDGE up to 59kbps per time-slot

Supports CSD (circuit-switched data)

Speakerphone

Hands-free headset jack (2.5mm, 3 or 4-barrel connector)

Microphone mute option

TTY/TDD compatible

3-way calling

Intel PXA270 Bulverde processor, 312MHz

SD/MultiMediaCard/SDIO card slot

•

•

1200mAH, rechargeable lithium ion

Removable for replacement

Palm OS 5.4.9

•

•

•

•

Still image capture resolution (640 x 480)

2x digital zoom

Video capture resolution (320 x 240)

Automatic light balance

4.44 in. x 2.33 in. x 0.84 in. (112.9mm x 59.3mm x 22.4mm)

5.6 ounces (157 grams)

S P E C I F I C A T I O N S 259

Connectivity

Display

Keyboard

Included software

System requirements

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

IR

Bluetooth ® wireless technology (1.2 compliant)

Touch-sensitive LCD screen (includes stylus)

65,536 colors (16-bit color)

User-adjustable brightness

320 x 320 resolution

Built-in QWERTY keyboard plus 5-way navigator

Backlight for low lighting conditions

Phone (including Favorites and Dial Pad)

Pictures & Videos

(includes camera and camcorder)

Messaging (text and multimedia)

Blazer ® web browser

(Internet)

Pocket Tunes™VersaMail ®

(email)

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Contacts

Calendar

Memos

Tasks

Voice Memo

Documents To Go

Professional ®

Calculator Basic and

Advanced

World Clock

Palm ® Desktop software

Windows 2000 or XP with USB port

Mac OS 10.2 –10.3 with USB port

Later versions may also be supported

260 S P E C I F I C A T I O N S

Operating and storage temperature range

•

•

32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C)

5% to 90% relative humidity (RH)

S P E C I F I C A T I O N S 261

262 S P E C I F I C A T I O N S

Index

selecting menu items and

29

SYMBOLS

! in Tasks list

156

NUMERICS

112 calls

76, 201

24-hour clock

195

3G2 files

132, 136

3GP files

132

5-way navigator accessing applications and

36

accessing command buttons and

29

answering phone calls and

201

entering alternate characters and

33

highlighting and selecting items and

28

location of

7

moving around screen and

27

navigating pick lists and

30

scrolling web pages and

110

A

AC charger

11, 12

accented characters

33, 34

accessing

Alert dialog box

167

alternate character list

34

application menus

29

applications

36, 37

Applications View

35

calculator

168

Call Log

46

camera

127

command buttons

29

Compose dialog box

95,

97

corporate servers

209

Dial Pad

51

email

81–95, 208

Favorites pages

45

files

161, 208

HotSync manager

179

information

202

items on expansion cards

187

items on pick lists

30

music player

139

on-device documentation

241

Palm online support

241

Pocket Tunes

140

Quick Tour

241

secure websites

109,

110, 234

voicemail

48, 49

web browser

36, 110

web pages

109, 111, 233

World Clock

153

accessories

7, 251

Account Name field

83

Account Setup command

84

Account Setup dialog box

83,

84

accounts

See also email accounts

call forwarding and

55

conference calls and

54

corporate mail servers and

208

customer service support for

241

setting preferences for

91

voicemail and

48

Accounts command

91

Acrobat files

161

activating items on screen

28

I N D E X 263

264 I N D E X

Active Call View screen

50,

52, 68

active calls. See phone calls

Add Bookmark command

111

Add Call button

51

Add Contact command

53

Add New Number dialog box

52

Add New Number prompt

52

Add Song button

142

Add to album command

134

adding accessories

7

additional security

205

attachments

86–87

Bluetooth devices

66–67,

122

bookmarks

111

business cards

60

caller ID photos

58, 59

captions to photos

128,

135

categories for applications

197

cities to World Clock

153

contacts

57

email addresses

85

emoticons

96

events

146, 147

favorite buttons

61–63

hands-free devices

64, 68

memos

162

partnerships

67, 118

passwords

203, 204

phone numbers

52

photos to albums

134

playlists

141, 142

private entries

204

QuickText phrases

96

signatures

94

tasks

154

videos to albums

134

voice memos

163

wallpaper

135

Address Bar

110

addresses adding multiple recipients

63, 95

assigning to favorite buttons

63

highlighting email

28

multimedia messages and

97

sending email and

85

synchronizing

225

text messages and

95, 99

viewing website

115, 116

web links and

109

adjusting screen brightness

50, 194, 208

adjusting volume alarm tones

151

music

141

phone calls

15, 71

ringer

72

video clips

130

voice memos

164

Advanced Mode (calculator)

168, 169

Advanced Mode command

168

agenda lists

145

Agenda View

73, 145, 150

Alarm check box

147

alarm clock

154

Alarm Preferences command

154

Alarm Sound pick list

152,

157

alarm tones

151

alarms

See also alerts

adding to calendar

147,

151

adding to tasks

155, 157

recording sounds for

152

setting for clock

154

Album command

134

Album list

131, 133, 135

albums. See photo albums;

video albums

Alert dialog box

49, 99, 167

alert icon

76

Alert Sound pick list

92

alert tones

71, 92, 104

alerts

See also alarms

clearing

168

displaying

167

message text in

103

receiving messages and

92, 98

responding to

49, 99, 220

voicemail and

49

aligning the screen

196

Alt key

33, 243

alternate characters

33, 34

alternate characters list

34

anniversaries

148

Answer button

47

answering phone calls

47

antenna

247

applets

109

application categories

37

application list view

197

Application pick list

193

application preferences

198,

199

applications

See also specific built-in

applications accessing

36, 37

associating with buttons

63, 198

beaming

178

categorizing

197

caution for

187, 213

changing screen fonts for

194

closing

35

copying

187

copying text to

115

customizing

197–198

deleting

18, 172, 173, 237

displaying

197

downloading

113, 171

getting help with

172

installing

170–171, 213

moving around in

25

opening

7, 35, 36, 52, 186

playing music and

141

running on expansion cards

236

searching in

167

sending over Bluetooth devices

175

setting default

199

switching

51

synchronizing

23, 179

transferring

17, 19, 175,

178, 187

troubleshooting

213

viewing information about

173–174

viewing menus for

29

viewing tips for

241

Applications button

7, 35, 37,

41

Applications View accessing

35

accessing items on expansion cards and

187

copying applications from

188

defined

243

displaying applications in

197

opening applications and

35

overview

36–37

applications, exiting

238

appointments

146, 225

I N D E X 265

266 I N D E X

See also events

Archive folder

172

area codes

74

area conversions

169

arrow icons

27

ASF files

132

Ask to add unknown phone numbers option

52, 60

Attach image option

97

Attach ringtone option

98

Attach Signature check box

94

Attach voice memo option

98

attachments adding

86–87

displaying

89

downloading

89

multimedia messages and

97

multiple files and

86

opening

161

pictures as

86, 128

removing

86

storing large

236

supported formats for

161

video clips as

86, 130

voice memos as

164

attendee information

148

audio

193

See also multimedia

messages; music; voice memos audio adapter

65

Audio Caption command

128

audio captions adding

128, 135

background music and

133

playing

132

Audio icon

132

Auto answer pick list

69

Auto Lock Device box

203

Auto naming pick list

130

Auto Sync dialog box

91

auto sync failures

92

Auto-complete check box

116

Auto-hide Toolbar option

133

Auto-Keyguard pick list

200

automated voicemail systems

48

Auto-off After pick list

208

auto-off interval

243

AVI files

132

B back icon (browser)

110

Background check box

150

background music

133

backgrounds

73, 150

backing up information

18,

23, 217

backlight (keyboard)

32, 194,

208

Backlight button

194

Backspace key

31

Backup folder

173, 214

Basic Mode (calculator)

168

Basic Mode command

168

basics

241

battery charging

11–13

displaying remaining power on

78

disposing of

219

inserting

10

maximizing life of

13, 207

removing

218

replacing

14, 217–218

viewing status of

13

battery consumption

14

battery door release

8

battery icon

13, 77

Beam Business Card command

60

Beam Category command

177

Beam command

177, 178

Beam From pick list

178

Beam Receive pick list

208

Beam Status dialog box

177,

178

beaming battery life and

14

defined

243

overview

176–178

troubleshooting

177, 178

turning off

208

bell

76, 167, 220

birthdays

148

blank screens

219

blank text messages

95

blank time slots

150

Blazer application

109

See also web browser

blinking bell

76, 167, 220

Bluetooth adapter

118, 119

Bluetooth application opening

66

sending from

175

setting up connections with

122, 123, 181

setting up dial-up networking and

119

visibility options in

175,

182

Bluetooth devices connecting to

66, 121–

124, 181

disabling or enabling

14,

68, 175

entering passkeys for

122,

123, 124

optimal range for

66

receiving information from

175

receiving phone calls and

50, 67, 228

sending over

174, 175

setting up

66–67

synchronizing over

181,

182, 221

troubleshooting

229, 230,

235

visibility options for

123,

175

Bluetooth icon

66, 78

Bluetooth icons (Phone application)

76

Bluetooth network icon

120

Bluetooth wireless technology

118, 243

BMP files

131

bonus software. See built-in

applications

Bookmark Page icon

113

bookmarks

111–113, 177

Bookmarks View

111, 112

Bookmarks View icon

112

border glow (highlight)

28

brightness (screen)

14, 50,

194, 208

brightness duration

(backlight)

194, 208

Brightness slider

208

browsing files

187

browsing the web. See web

browsing built-in applications

170, 172,

241

See also applications;

specific application

built-in camera. See camera

built-in security software

199

business cards

60, 177

buttons

See also favorite buttons

5-way navigator

27

accessing command

29

changing defaults for

198

customizing

198

disabling

51, 201

highlighted on screen

28

I N D E X 267

268 I N D E X restoring factory defaults

198

speed-dialing with

63

web browsing and

198

45, 62–

110

Buttons Preferences screen

C cache

117, 237

Calc button

168

calculating disk space

18

calculator

33, 168

Calculator application

168–

169

calculator modes

168

calendar

See also Calendar

application customizing

150–151

deleting events from

149

displaying

145

saving

100

scheduling events for

146,

147, 148

selecting alarm tones for

151

selecting specific dates on

146

viewing tasks on

150

Calendar application changing fonts for

194

changing views for

145

color-coding events

149

creating events with

146,

147, 148

displaying events

73

opening

36, 73

overview

145

setting alarms from

147

setting default view for

150

setting display options in

150–151

synchronizing information in

23

Calendar button

7, 35, 36,

145

Calendar views

145, 150

Call Barring command

72

Call Barring preferences

72

call forwarding

55–56

call forwarding icon

76

Call Log screen

46, 53

Call Preferences command

55

Call Preferences dialog box

55, 56

Call Totals dialog box

56

call waiting

53

Call Waiting dialog box

54

caller IDs

58, 59

calls. See phone calls

camcorder

128, 129, 130

camcorder buttons

129

Camcorder View

130, 135

camera

127, 130, 235

camera buttons

128

Camera icon

127, 128

camera lens

8

Camera View

130, 135

cancelling menu selection

29

Caps Lock mode

32

captions. See audio captions;

voice captions

Card category

186

Card Info application

188–

189

Card Info button

188

card readers

139

carrying cases

229

cascading style sheets

111,

116

categories adding ringtones for

59

applications and

37, 197

beaming and

177

color-coding in

149

contacts and

57, 60

creating

197

events and

149, 150

memos and

163

naming

197

receiving from Bluetooth and

176

tasks and

155, 156, 157

Category command

197

category marker

150

Category pick list

150, 151,

197

CDs

139

Center button

7

certificates

109

changing bookmarks

112

button defaults

198

contact information

58

default applications

199

email accounts

91

events

149

favorite buttons

63

information

16

owner information

206

passwords

204, 205

personal IDs

202

playlists

142

QuickText phrases

96

screen fonts

194

synchronization defaults

179, 180, 181, 189

synchronization software

224

web page layouts

110

character entry

32, 34

See also text

character limits memos

162

text messages

95

character searches

167

charge indicator

7, 12, 13

charger cable

12

charging smartphone

11, 12, 14

smartphone battery

11–13

charging status

13

chat icon

102, 105

Chat page (Preferences)

103

chat sessions

101, 103

Chat view

101

Choose song button

141

Choose Songs command

142

circuit-switched data connections

243

city information

153, 207

City pick list

153

Clear Cache button

117

Clear Cookies button

117

clock

152, 195

See also World Clock

closing application menus

29

applications

35

pick lists

30

closing applications

238

color palette

130

color preferences

103, 130,

196

Color Theme Preferences screen

196

color-coded category marker

150

color-coding events

149

colored backgrounds

28

command buttons

29 commands. See menu items

completed tasks

155, 156,

157

completion dates

157

components (smartphone)

1

Compose dialog box

95, 96,

97

Compress Day View check box

150

I N D E X 269

270 I N D E X compressed files

170, 171

computers connecting smartphone to

16, 21

creating partnerships for

118

downloading applications to

171

installing applications from

171, 215

installing synchronization software on

20

quarantined files on

18,

19, 213

setting up DUN connections for

119

synchronizing with

17, 23

transferring information to

23

transferring multimedia to

136

transferring music from

138, 139–140

Con button (calculator)

169

Conduit Settings command

180

conduits

146, 225

Conference button

54

conference calls

54

Confirm message deletion check box

102

conflicting applications

18,

187, 213

conflicting events

150

Connect Bluetooth command

68

connecting headsets

64–65

to Bluetooth devices

66,

121–124

to personal computers

16,

21

to virtual private networks

208

to voicemail system

48,

49

to websites

109, 110,

117, 118

connection icons (browser)

110

connections dial-up networking and

118, 120

messaging preferences for

103

receiving over Bluetooth

175

restrictions for

51

sending over Bluetooth

174, 175

setting up Bluetooth

181

setting up smartphone

16

synchronizing over

Bluetooth

181, 182

synchronizing over infrared

183–184

troubleshooting

48, 227,

232, 235

unsupported

121

viewing status of

76, 110,

120, 231, 232

constants

169

consumption factors (battery)

14

Contact Edit dialog box

57

contact names

44

contacts

See also Contacts

application adding photos to

135

adding speed-dial buttons for

62

assigning caller IDs to

59

copying

61

creating

57

customizing

60

deleting

60

displaying

58

editing

58

entering phone numbers for

52, 73

importing

58

looking up

62

marking as private

57

reordering

57

saving

100

searching for

44, 58, 73

viewing details about

45

Contacts application

57

adding events to

148

changing fonts for

194


23

Contacts list

28, 57, 60

contracts

1

conversion functions

(calculator)

168, 169

cookies

109, 116, 117

Copy button

134, 188

Copy command

115, 188

Copy Items dialog box

134

Copy items to pick list

134

Copy to command

134

Copy To pick list

188

copying applications

187

contact information

61

multimedia files

136, 139

music files

138

phone numbers

43, 115

photos

133

text

114

user folders

214

videos

133

copyrighted materials

133

corporate email accounts

208

corporate servers

23, 208

country-specific preferences.

See language settings coupling

228

coverage area

14, 76, 227

coverage area alerts

71

Coverage in/out pick list

71

crashes

220

Create chats from messages pick list

103

Create new messages as pick list

102

creating albums

134

audio captions

128, 135

bookmarks

111

business cards

60

caller ID photos

58, 59

categories for applications

197

chat sessions

101, 103

cities for World Clock

153

contacts

57

email messages

85, 109

events

146, 147

memos

162

multimedia messages

97

partnerships

67, 118

passwords

203, 204

playlists

141, 142

private entries

204

QuickText phrases

96

signatures

94

speed-dial buttons

62–63

tasks

154

text messages

95–98

voice memos

163

wallpaper

135

CSD (circuit-switched data)

243

current date and time

152

current events

73

Current Privacy pick list

204,

205

customer service (Palm)

241

customizing applications

197–198

I N D E X 271

272 I N D E X buttons

198

calendar

150–151

camera

130

chat sessions

103

contacts

60

email

91–94

Keyguard

200

messaging options

102

smartphone

151, 191

system date and time

206

system sounds

193–194

tasks

157

web browser

115–117

D daily events

145

Daily Repeating Events check box

151

daily schedules

145

data. See information

data service icons

231, 232

data services

81, 109

data transfer

1, 76

databases

167

Date & Time Preferences screen

147, 206

date formats

195

date preferences

206

Date stamp pick list

130

dates adding to photos

130

changing event

149

completed tasks and

156,

157

displaying

145, 152

selecting

146

setting

155, 206

sorting on

101

synchronizing

206

viewing due

156, 157

datestamps

130

Day View

145, 150

daylight savings

153, 154

Daylight Savings Time check box

154

decimal display formats

(calculator)

169

decimal values

169, 195

decompression utilities

171

Default Alarm pick list

152

Default Apps Preferences screen

199

default settings

198

Default View pick list

73, 150

degrees

169

delays

203, 231

Delete command

90, 135,

173

delete confirmation messages

102

Delete Contact command

60

Delete events older than pick list

149

Delete From pick list

173

Delete Memo command

163

Delete Old command

90

Delete Task command

157

deleting albums

134, 135

alerts

168

applications

18, 172, 173,

237

attachments

86

bookmarks

112

contacts

60

cookies

117

device names

19

email

90, 236

events

149

favorite buttons

64

files

237

memos

163

messages

101, 102

music from playlists

142

passwords

204

photos

128, 134, 136

playlists

142

tasks

157

video clips

129, 134, 136

desktop software. See Palm

Desktop software

Details button

29

Details command

135

Device Name field

66, 176

device names

Bluetooth devices and

66,

176, 181

defined

243

entering

19, 220

devices

See also Bluetooth

devices; hands-free devices; smartphone entering passkeys and

67

radio frequency emissions and

247, 251

synchronization and

224

upgrades and

17, 62, 223

Dial another call prompt

53

Dial button

46

Dial Extra Digits

Automatically option

63

Dial Number dialog box

46

Dial Pad

33, 43

Dial Pad button

51

Dial Preferences screen

73

dial text

120

dialog boxes accessing command buttons on

29

defined

243

getting help with

241

highlighted buttons in

28

dial-up networking

77, 118–

121, 235

digital cameras

131

See also camera

dimmed images

219

dimming keyboard backlight

194, 208

dimming the touchscreen

36

Disable cookies check box

116

Disable JavaScript check box

116

disabling

Add New Number prompt

52

Bluetooth devices

14, 68

cookies

116

Keyguard

41, 200

onscreen buttons

51, 201

Phone Lock settings

202

system sounds

193

the touchscreen

200

touch-sensitive features

201

web page images

111,

117

disconnecting sync cable

24

discovery

121, 122, 176

Discovery icon

122

Discovery Results list

122,

175

discussion groups

241

disk space (smartphone)

17,

18, 236

Display my name in chat window as entry field

103

Display Options command

150

Display Options dialog box

150

displaying alerts

167


34

application information

173–174

application menus

29

applications

197

attachments

89

available disk space

18

bookmarks

111

I N D E X 273

274 I N D E X connection status

76, 110,

120, 231, 232

contact information

45, 58


152

due dates

156, 157

email messages

87, 88

error messages

239

event categories

150

events

73, 145, 150, 151

favorite buttons

45

items in pick lists

30

multimedia messages

99

overdue tasks

145

personal calendar

145

photos

130, 131, 136

private entries

205

Quick Tour documentation

241

signal strength

76

slide shows

132

tasks

150, 156, 157

unread messages

77,

145, 150

video clips

130, 132, 136

video recording time

128

voicemail messages

76

web addresses

116

web pages

109, 110

DOC files

161

documentation

2, 3, 27, 241

Documents application

161–

162

Documents button

162

Documents To Go application

161

Documents To Go icon

162

Down button (navigator)

28,

29, 30

downloading applications

113, 171

attachments

89

email messages

91

files

113, 131, 170

multimedia messages

103

Palm-specific information and updates

241

ringtones

69

text messages

98

Downloads bookmark

113

drafts

86, 96

Drafts button

86

drained battery icon

13

draining the battery

11, 13

Draw on command

128

drivers

183

Due Date pick list

155

due dates

155, 157

DUN (dial-up networking) connections

77, 118–121,

235

E earpiece

7

eBooks

19

echoes

228

EDGE connections

76, 244

troubleshooting

232, 234

Edit Bookmark List dialog box

113

Edit Bookmarks command

112, 113

Edit Category screen

59

Edit Favorite command

63

Edit Location dialog box

207

Edit Playlist dialog box

142

edit screens

29

editing. See changing

Effects pick list

130

electrostatic discharge

257

email accessing

81–95, 208

adding multiple recipients to

63, 95

adding signatures

94

attaching photos to

86,

128, 133

attaching ringtones

87

attaching videos to

86,

130, 133

attaching voice memos to

164

checking

77

creating

85, 109

customizing

91–94

defining favorite buttons for

63

deleting

90, 236

dialing from

46

downloading

91

forwarding

88

opening attachments for

161

removing attachments for

86

replying to

88

requirements for

1

resending

86

restrictions for

51

retrieving

77, 87

scrolling

88

selecting default application for

199

sending

86, 99, 109

setting alerts for

92

sort options for

90

storing attachments

236

troubleshooting

230

viewing attachments

89

viewing status of

89

viewing unread messages for

77, 145, 150

email accounts changing

91

setting email preferences and

91

setting up

81, 83, 84, 94

email application

81

email applications

57, 233

Email icon

83

email options

85, 90

email providers

81, 82

emergency calls

76, 201

emoticons

96

empty battery icon

13

empty time slots

150

emptying Trash folder

90

Enable background play check box

141

Enable Fixed Number Dialing check box

202

encryption

109

Eng(x) display format

169

engineering notation

169

entering alternate characters

33, 34

decimal values

169, 195

device names

19, 220

email addresses

85

events

146, 147, 148

information

16

lock codes

201

numbers

32, 168

owner preferences

206

passkeys

66, 67, 119, 122

passwords

49, 203, 204

phone numbers

43–46,

56, 60, 73

tasks

154

text

32, 162

URLs

110, 116

web addresses

110

entry fields

174

envelope icon

90

erasing information

220

error messages

238

errors

223, 228, 238

Escalate ring tone volume check box

70

ESD (electrostatic discharge)

257

event conflicts

150

I N D E X 275

276 I N D E X

Event Details dialog box

147,

148, 149

events changing

149

color-coding

149

creating

146, 147

deleting

149

displaying

73, 145, 150,

151

incorrect time zones and

225

scheduling repeating

148

setting alarms for

147,

151


147

synchronizing

145

troubleshooting

225–227

viewing categories of

150

viewing duration of

150

Excel spreadsheets

79, 87,

161

Exchange ActiveSync

94

Exchange Address Book

225

Exchange Servers

94, 145

exiting applications

238

expansion card slot

185, 186

expansion cards accessing items on

187

caution for

18, 187, 189

copying to

133, 138, 187,

189

deleting applications on

172

displaying photo or video albums on

131

downloading to

113

formatting

189

inserting

185

installing applications on

172

managing files on

187

moving files to

19

opening items on

162,

186, 236

removing

186

renaming

188

sending attachments to

88, 89

storing information on

18,

165, 185

transferring applications from

187

viewing information about

188

extensions (phone)

51, 63

extra digits button (Active

Call View)

51

Extra Digits option (New

Favorites)

63

Extract Call button

55

F factory-installed applications

172

fade setting

150

Fast mode (browser)

116

Fast mode icon

111

favorite buttons adding

61–63

defined

244

deleting

64

dialing with

45

displaying

45

editing

63

organizing

64

transferring to smartphone

62

Favorites tab

45

FDN list

202

features (smartphone)

1, 7–8

feedback

228

fields

30

file types

97, 113, 131, 132

files accessing

161, 208

attaching to email

86, 87

browsing

187

checking size of

174

deleting

237

downloading

113, 131,

170

incompatible applications and

18, 19

moving to expansion cards

19, 237

opening

161, 162

saving

162

streaming

114

transferring to smartphone

17, 161

Files application

187

financial calculator

168

financial functions

169

Find dialog box

167

Find More button

167

Find Text on Page command

115

finding chat sessions

101

contacts

44, 58, 73

specific characters

167

text

115, 167

firewalls

208

5-way navigator accessing applications and

36

accessing command buttons and

29


201

entering alternate characters and

33

highlighting and selecting items and

28

location of

7

moving around screen and

27

navigating pick lists and

30

scrolling web pages and

110

selecting menu items and

29

Fixed display format

169

fixed number dialing

202

flight mode

42

Float display format

169

folder pick list

90

folders accessing

225

locating

18, 220

removing messages from

101

sorting messages in

100

switching between email

90

Font command

110, 194

font size

110, 195

Font size pick list

195

fonts

194

forgetting passwords

203,

205

Format Card command

189

Formats Preferences screen

195

Formats tab

195

formatting expansion cards

189

forums

241

Forward all calls pick list

55,

56

forward icon (browser)

110

forwarding email

88

phone calls

55–56

free disk space, determining

18

freeing disk space

18, 236

freeing memory

117, 172,

236

freezes

213, 216

From pick list

188

I N D E X 277

278 I N D E X full charge (battery)

11

G

Game Volume pick list

194

General Packet Radio Service

(GPRS) technology

244

getting started

3, 5, 15, 241

GIF files

131

Glossary

243

glow (highlight)

28

GPRS connections

76, 232,

234, 244

GPRS technology

244

GPS receivers

124

gradients

169

graphics. See images

grouping photos or videos

132

groupware

94

H hands-free devices adding

64, 68

checking status of

77

connecting to

66, 121

disabling or enabling

50


67

finding compatible

65

passkeys and

67


67, 68

restrictions for

65

switching between

68

troubleshooting

229–230

hands-free kits

251

Hands-free Preferences screen

68

Hands-free Setup button

67

hanging up phone

51, 53, 54

hard resets

203, 216

hardware

1

headphones

65, 136

headset button

47, 50, 65

headset jack

8

headsets

See also hands-free

devices connecting to smartphone

64–65


124


47, 50, 51

restrictions for

65

help

211, 238, 241

hexadecimal characters

169

Hide Records option

204

hiding blank time slots

150

Pictures & Videos toolbar

133

private entries

204

web browser toolbar

114

High Priority command

98

highlighted buttons

28

highlighting applications

36, 37

favorite buttons

45

items in pick lists

30

items on screen

28

menu items

29

phone numbers

46

text

28, 29, 115

web links

28, 110

hints

203

History command

115

History list

115

Hold button

50

holidays

148

home city

153

home page

116

home page icon

110, 116

HotSync Log

223

HotSync manager

179, 182,

183, 244

HotSync manager icon

179,

221

HotSync Setup button

182

HotSync technology

244

hypertext links. See web

links

I icons

75, 140, 197

Ignore button

48

Ignore with Text button

48

image files

97, 113, 131

images

See also photos; pictures

dimmed

219

disabling web page

111,

117

downloading

113

saving

114

selecting as wallpaper

72

sending

97

storing

236

transferring to expansion cards

19, 236

troubleshooting

234

Import from SIM command

58

importing contact information

58

phone numbers

155

inactivity

203, 208, 219

Inbox

28, 87, 105

Inbox icons

89

Incoming dialog box

93

incoming messages

104

incoming phone calls

47, 53,

69, 201

incompatible applications

18,

187, 213

Incompatible Apps directory

18

indicator light

7, 12, 13

Info command

18, 173

Info screens

173

information accessing

202

backing up

18, 23, 217

beaming

177

changing

16

entering

16, 32–33

erasing all

220

hard resets and

203, 216

losing

189, 203, 217

marking as private

204–

205

masking

200, 204

protecting

199, 202

receiving

175, 178

sending over Bluetooth devices

174

storing

18, 165, 185, 236

synchronizing

17, 20, 23,

179

transferring

17, 23, 176

updating

17, 23, 165

infrared port beaming from

177, 178

defined

244

location of

9

synchronizing with

183,

221

inserting battery

10

SIM card

9

installer

170

installing applications

170–171, 213

bonus software

24, 170

Palm Desktop software

17, 171, 215


20–21

third-party applications

236

VPN client software

209

interference

228, 230

international characters. See


international clock. See

World Clock

I N D E X 279

280 I N D E X

international settings. See

language settings

Internet

107, 131, 170, 232

See also web browsing;

websites interruptions

238

Into album pick list

134

invalid characters

96

IR communications

176

IR port beaming from

177, 178

defined

244

location of

9

synchronizing with

183,

221

items in pick lists

30

items on screen activating

28

highlighting

28

selecting

28

iTunes

136, 138, 140

J

Java applets

109

JavaScript elements

116

JPEG formats

136

JPG files

131

K

key terms. See Glossary

keyboard accessing alternate characters on

32

dialing with

43

entering information from

32–33

illustrated

31

incremental searches from

44, 73

locking

41, 200

restoring factory defaults

198

keyboard backlight

32, 194,

208

Keyguard

200–201

Keyguard Preferences screen

200, 201

Known Caller pick list

70

L

Label color pick list

103

land lines

48

language selection screen

11, 21

language settings

11, 195,

215

laptops

182, 183

large attachments

236

Left button (navigator)

28,

29, 30

length functions

169

liability

ii

lightning bolts

13, 77

Li-Ion battery

244

See also battery

links

99

See also web links

List By option

60

list screens

28, 29

See also pick lists

list view (applications)

197

listening to music

65, 136, 140

voice captions

132

voice memos

164

voicemail

49

Lithium Ion battery

244

See also battery

Local button

183

locating chat sessions

101

contacts

44, 58, 73

specific characters

167

text

115, 167

location information

206

Lock & Turn Off option

204

lock codes

201

Lock Device dialog box

203

Lock icon

110, 133, 172, 177

Lock SIM check box

202

locking keyboard

41, 200

phone

201–202

screen

201

Treo smartphone

202,

losing

203

logging in to corporate servers

208

logic functions

169

looking up contacts

62

Lookup button

62

loops

216

information passwords

189, 203, 217

203, 205

Lost Password option low coverage areas lowercase letters

32

205

227

M

M4V files

132

Mac systems installing applications from

171


20

installing to expansion cards and

172

removing applications and

173

requirements for

17

sending email and

81, 91

synchronizing with

23,

180, 184, 222, 223


138, 139, 140

uninstalling desktop software and

222

upgrading and

19

user folders on

214

magnet

8

mail. See email

Mail Service pick list

83, 84

Manage Playlists command

141, 142

map (World Clock)

153

marking information as private

57, 204–205

Mask Records option

204

masks

200, 204

mathematical functions

169

maximizing battery life

13,

207

Media application

136

media features

14

Media Player

137, 139, 140

memory

117, 149, 236

freeing

172, 236

memory slots (calculator)

169

memos

See also Memos

application; notes creating

162

deleting

163

recording

163

sending voice

98

truncated text in

227

Memos application changing fonts for

194

entering text in

162

opening

36, 162

overview

159

removing memos from

163


23

Memos button

162

menu items

29

Menu key

7, 30, 31

menu shortcuts

30

menus

29

I N D E X 281

282 I N D E X

Message command

47

message icons

105

message lists

101

Message Tone pick list

104

Message validity period pick list

103

messages

See also email; multimedia

messages; text messages adding graphical elements to

97

adding multiple recipients for

63

arranging in folders

100

chat sessions and

101

checking status of

77

checking voicemail

76

creating

95, 97, 98

defining favorite buttons for

63

deleting

101, 102

displaying status of

105

displaying unread

77, 145,

150

including in alerts

103

invalid characters in

96

memory consumption and

237

paging from

95

previewing

98

retrieving voicemail

49, 76

saving

96

selecting phone numbers in

46

setting colors for

103


102–104

specifying priority settings for

98

storing

105

troubleshooting

231

Messages page

(Preferences)

102

messaging

79, 231–232

See also text messages

Messaging application

See also multimedia

messages; text messages changing fonts for

194

creating chat sessions from

101

creating multimedia messages with

97

creating text messages with

95

customizing

102

deleting messages in

101

opening

36

overview

95

sorting messages in

100

status indicators for

105

viewing contacts from

57

viewing multimedia messages in

99

messaging applications

199

Messaging button

7, 35, 36

Messaging Inbox

28

messaging preferences

102–

104

messaging services

1, 95

metric values

169

microphone

8, 51, 130

Microphone pick list

130

Microsoft Excel

79, 87, 161

Microsoft Exchange

ActiveSync

94

Microsoft Exchange Servers

94, 145

Microsoft Office Manager

See Documents application

Microsoft Outlook. See

Outlook

Microsoft Windows. See

Windows systems

Microsoft Word documents

79, 87, 161

minutes usage information

(phone)

56

mirror

8

mismatched language setups

215

MMS messaging services

95, 231, 244

mobile networks

227

modems

118

Modify FDN command

202

monitoring phone status

75

Month View

145, 151

Move to command

134

moving around on screen

25,

27

moving through web pages

110, 116

MP3 files

138

MP3 formats

136

MP4 files

132

MPEG-4 formats

136

MPG files

132

multi-connector pin

8

multimedia files

97, 131,

132, 237

multimedia message icons

105

multimedia messages

See also Messaging

application addressing

97

attaching photos to

128,

133

attaching videos to

130,

133

attaching voice memos to

164

checking status of

77

creating

97

deleting

101

dialing from

46

displaying details of

100

downloading

103


237

playing

99

previewing

98

requirements for

3

restrictions for

51

retrieving

77, 98

selecting alert tones for

104

selecting text in

100

sending

95, 98

setting delivery confirmation for

102

troubleshooting

231

viewing

99

multimedia messaging services

1, 95, 231

Multimedia Messaging

System (MMS)

244

MultiMediaCard cards

185

music adjusting volume

141


47

changing playlists for

142

converting to MP3 formats

137, 138, 139

creating playlists for

141,

142

downloading

113

hands-free devices and

65

listening to

65, 136, 140


237

pausing

141

playing

114, 140, 141

selecting

141

stopping

141

uploading

138

music files

113, 136, 138,

237

I N D E X 283

284 I N D E X

music player. See Pocket

Tunes music subscription services

137

Music_Audio folder

139

mute button

51

My Treo icon

241

N names email providers and

81

sorting on

101

synchronizing and

220,

243

naming categories

197

device

19, 220

email accounts

83

expansion cards

189

photo albums

127

photo groups

130

playlists

141

video albums

129

voice memos

163, 164

navigator buttons

7, 27

See also 5-way navigator

Network Configuration options

104

network connection icon

120

Network Preferences page

103

networks

74, 227, 232

New Bookmark dialog box

111

New button

29

New Contact command

57

New Favorite command

62

New Favorites dialog box

62,

63

New Message dialog box

85,

86

Next Song button

140

No Service message

15, 76

No Service—SOS Only message

76

Normal mode (browser)

111,

116

Note button

58

notes adding

58, 149, 155

storing

162

notifications

49, 76, 92

See also alerts

number formats

195

numbers calculator display options for

169

entering

32, 168

O offline synchronization

224

offline viewing (web)

111

OK button

29

online forums

241

online support (Palm)

241

opening

Alert dialog box

167

application menus

29

applications

7, 35, 36, 52,

186

Applications View

35

Bookmarks View

111

Call Log

46

Dial Pad

43, 51

email applications

233

email attachments

161

files

161, 162

History list

115

HotSync manager

179

on-device documentation

241

Pocket Tunes

140

Quick Tour

241

web browser

36, 110

web pages

99, 116, 234

World Clock

153

operating system

(smartphone)

17, 245

operating systems (PCs)

17,

215

Optimized Mode (browser)

109, 110

Option key

31, 32, 36, 244

Option key indicator

32

Option Lock indicator

32

Option Lock mode

32, 96

options in pick lists

30

Organize Favorites command

62, 64

organizer features

14, 42

Outbox

105

Outbox button

85

outgoing messages

105

Outlook caller IDs and

59

duplicate entries in

225

entering appointments and

146


225

synchronizing with

16, 21,

23, 224, 225

time zones and

146

Outlook folders

225

overdue tasks

145, 150, 156

owner information

206

Owner Preferences screen

206

P page icon

105

Page View

112, 115, 116

paging

95

paired relationships. See

partnerships

pairing. See partnerships

Palm (online support)

241

Palm Desktop software caller IDs and

59

defined

244

device names in

243


226

installing

17, 171, 215

multiple appointments and

146

password-protecting

205

reinstalling

224

synchronizing with

16, 18,

23, 221

time zones and

146

troubleshooting

215, 221

uninstalling

222

viewing and editing media from

136

PALM folder

127, 128

Palm OS software

17, 170,

245

Palm OS-compatible applications

170

Palm Quick Install. See Quick

Install

Palm Software Installation

CD

2, 20, 215

paper clip icon

86, 89

partial battery icon

13

partnerships

67, 118, 245

passkeys

66, 67, 119, 122

Password box

203, 205

password hints

203

passwords call barring and

72

changing

204, 205

deleting

204

dialing

51, 63

email and

84, 85

forgetting

203, 205

owner preferences and

206

private entries and

200,

204

requiring

202

unlocking smartphone and

203

I N D E X 285

286 I N D E X voicemail and

49

Paste command

43, 115

pasting phone numbers

43

text

115

Pause button

141

pausing music

141

streamed content

114

video playback

130, 132

video recording

130

voice memos

163, 164

PCs. See personal

computers

PDB files

170

PDF files

87, 161

pending alerts

99, 220

pending messages

102, 105

personal computers connecting smartphone to

16, 21

creating partnerships for

118

downloading applications to

171


171, 215


20

quarantined files on

18,

19, 213

setting up DUN connections for

119

synchronizing with

17, 23

transferring information to

23

transferring multimedia to

136


138, 139–140

personal identification numbers (PINs)

245

personal information

143,

199, 202, 206

See also information

personal information managers

215, 245

personal schedules

145

personalizing smartphone

151, 191

See also preferences

phone

See also phone calls

answering

47

conference calls and

54

dialing

43–46, 62, 115

documentation conventions for

41

getting started with

15

hands-free devices and

64, 67, 68

hanging up

51, 53, 54

locking

201–202

overview

50–51

restrictions for

51


71

selecting ringtones for

69–

70


55,

56, 73

silencing ringer for

48, 193

troubleshooting

227–229

turning on and off

42

viewing Call Log for

46

viewing minutes usage for

56

viewing status of

75

Phone application accessing Dial Pad in

51

adding caller IDs

58, 59

contact information and

44, 57, 58

creating speed-dial buttons from

62

customizing

72–73

defined

245

displaying events in

151

opening

36, 42

overview

39

selecting wallpaper for

72,

135

selecting wireless networks from

74

setting alert tones from

71

setting dialing preferences in

73

status icons for

75–77

using TTY

75

Phone button

7, 35, 36

Phone Call screen

47

phone calls

See also phone; phone

numbers adding a second

53

adjusting volume for

15,

71

answering multiple

54

automatically answering

69

barring

72

disabling screen for

201

forwarding

55–56

keyboard backlight and

32

listening to music and

47

making

43–46, 51, 53

placing on hold

50, 53

receiving

47, 53

restricting

202

running applications and

51

sending to voicemail

48

switching between active

54

text messages and

99

viewing details about

50

Phone Display Options command

72

phone icons

76

phone indicator. See indicator

light

Phone Info command

16

Phone Info screen

16

Phone Lock

201

Phone Lock command

202

Phone Lock settings

202

phone numbers adding

52

assigning prefixes to

74

assigning to Quick Keys

62

clearing

43

copying

43, 115

creating speed-dial buttons for

62–63

dialing extra digits with

51,

63

entering

43–46, 56, 60, 73

getting device

16

highlighting

28

importing

155

pasting into Dial Pad

43

redialing most recent

46

saving

53

selecting

46

Phone Off message

42, 76

photo albums

127, 131, 134

Photo Settings screen

130

photos

See also pictures

adding as wallpaper

135

adding caller ID

58, 59

adding captions to

128

adding to albums

134

adding to contacts

135

attaching to multimedia messages

97

backing up

136

copying

133

deleting

128, 136

displaying information about

135

downloading

113

grouping

132

I N D E X 287

288 I N D E X personalizing

128

removing from albums

134, 135

repositioning

131

rotating

135

saving

100, 128, 130

selecting as backgrounds

150

sending

86, 128, 133

setting default size

130


130

storing

125, 127

viewing

130, 131, 136

pick lists

28, 30

Pics&Videos icon

131

picture formats

131

Picture list

133

pictures

See also images; photos

adding to contacts

59

previewing

130

saving

100, 128, 130


130–131

taking

127, 127–128, 235

Pictures & Videos application copying pictures and videos in

134

creating wallpaper with

135

hiding toolbar in

133

opening

131

organizing media with

134

removing photos or videos from

135

rotating photos in

135

sending pictures or videos from

133


23

viewing pictures in

131

viewing slide shows in

132

viewing videos in

132

PIMs

215, 245

PIN unlock key

245

PINs

201, 245

plain text formats

88

Play button

140

Play icon (browser)

114

playback pausing

114, 130, 132,

141

resuming

114, 141

stopping

100, 141, 164

playing multimedia messages

99

music

114, 140, 141

streamed content

114

video clips

129, 132

voice captions

132

voice memos

164

playlists

141–142

Playlists command

142

plug-ins

233

Pocket Tunes application changing playlists in

142

compatible formats for

137

creating playlists in

141

opening

139

overview

136

playing music from

140,

141

upgrading

137

Pocket Tunes icons

140

POP protocols

93

Power Preferences screen

14, 207

Power/End button

7, 41, 42

PowerPoint files

87, 161

PPT files

161

PRC files

170

precautions

247, 257, 258

predefined passkeys

67,

123, 124

preferences alarm tones

151

alert tones

71

applications

198, 199

buttons

198

calculator

169

camcorder

130

camera

130

contact information

60

country-specific

195

dialing

73

email

91, 93–94

events

147

hands-free devices

68

Keyguard

200

messaging

102–104

owner information

206

phone

55, 56, 73

power settings

208

ringtones

69, 70

system colors

196


147,

206

system sounds

193

tasks

157

web browser

112

web pages

115–117

prefixes (phone numbers)

74

Prefs button

206

preinstalled applications

170,

172, 241


specific application preset delays

203

preset passkeys

67, 123,

124

pressing keyboard keys

32

pressing onscreen buttons

201

previewing messages

98

Previous Song button

140

primary applications

36, 198

primary button assignments

198

prioritizing tasks

155, 157

priority levels

155, 157

priority settings

98

privacy flag

155

Privacy Mode check box

102

Private check box

204

private entries

200, 204–205

caution for

205

programs. See applications;

software progress indicator bar (video recording)

130

Prompt sound pick list

130

protecting personal information protecting the screen protecting Treo smartphone

199–206

Protocol pick list proxy servers pTunes icon

157

Purge pick list

139

PUK (PIN unlock key) punctuation marks

Purge command

199, 202

84

117

101, 149,

101

7

245

32, 34

purging old information

19

Q quarantined files

18, 19, 213

quick buttons

35, 36, 198

Quick Install

172, 245

Quick Keys

62, 63, 245

Quick Tour

241

Quick Tour icon

241

QuickText button

96

QuickText phrases

96

R radians

169

radio frequency emissions

247, 248

I N D E X 289

290 I N D E X random number generator

169

range (Bluetooth devices)

66

Rcl button (calculator)

169

readjusting the screen

196

receipts (messaging)

102

recently viewed web page icon

110

rechargeable battery

2

See also battery

Record command

177

Record Completion Date check box

157

Record new option

98

recorder

163

recording ringtones

70

sounds

152

videos

97, 128–129

voice memos

163

Records button

174

recovering information

220

recovering lost passwords

205

recurring events. See

repeating events red paper clip icon

86

Redial list

46

redirector (websites)

233

reducing storage space

18

Refresh command

233

refresh icon (browser)

111

refreshing web pages

111,

233

Regulatory Information

247

reinstalling Palm Desktop software

224

reinstalling third-party applications

213, 214, 217

Remember Last Category option

60

Reminder Sound pick list

152 reminders. See alarms; alerts

Remove from album command

134

removing albums

134, 135

alerts

168

applications

18, 172, 173,

237

attachments

86

bookmarks

112

contacts

60

cookies

117

device names

19

email

90, 236

events

149

expansion cards

186

favorite buttons

64

files

237

memos

163

messages

101, 102

music from playlists

142

passwords

204

photos

128, 134, 136

playlists

142

tasks

157

video clips

129, 134, 136

Rename Card command

189

Rename Memo command

164

repeat intervals (events)

148

Repeat pick list

148, 152,

155

repeating alarms

152

repeating event icon

148

repeating events

148, 151

repeating tasks

155

replacing smartphone battery

14, 217–218

Request Receipts pick list

102

rescheduling events

149

Reset Counters button

56

resets

213, 215–217, 228,

238

caution for

203, 216

resizing text

110

Resolution pick list

130

resolution settings

(camcorder)

129

resolution settings (camera)

127

restarting Treo smartphone.

See resets restoring factory defaults

198

resuming playback

114, 141

Return key

31

Review photos/videos pick list

130

RF emissions

247, 248

Right button (navigator)

28,

29, 30

ringer adjusting volume

72

silencing

48

turning off

193

Ringer switch

9, 42, 193

ringtone file types

97, 113

Ringtone pick list

59

ringtone preferences

69, 70

ringtones assigning to caller IDs

59

downloading

69, 113

recording

70

sending with messages

87, 97, 98

setting for phone roaming

70, 104

Roaming pick list

Rotate command rotating photos

70

135

135

69–70

S

Safety Statement (FCC)

247

Save As command

162

Save as Contact command

135

Save as Wallpaper command

135

Save List button

142

Save Page command

111

Save Picture command

100

Save Sound command

100

saved web page indicator

111

saving calendars

100

contact information

100

files

162

images

114

messages

96

phone numbers

53

pictures

100, 128, 130

playlists

142

video clips

129, 130

voice memos

163

web pages

111

schedules

145

scheduling events

146, 147,

148

Sci(x) display format

169

scientific calculator

168

scientific notation

169

screen accessing command buttons on

29

activating items on

28

activating wrong features

219

adjusting brightness

50,

194, 208

aligning

196

battery life and

14

dimming

36

disabling

200, 201

highlighting items on

28

locking

201

moving around on

25, 27

protecting

7

selecting items on

28, 30

troubleshooting

219–220,

229

I N D E X 291

292 I N D E X turning on or off

41, 208,

229, 243

waking up

41

screen fonts

194

screen protectors

219

scroll arrows

28, 88

scrolling

110

scrolling preferences

116

SD cards

185

SDIO cards

185

search results

167

searching for contacts

45, 58, 73

specific characters

167

text

115, 167

wireless services

74

secondary applications

36,

198

secure websites

109, 110,

234

security

67, 199, 204, 205

Security button

203, 204

security certificates

109

Security command

205

Security screen

203

security software

199

Select Business Card command

60

Select Font dialog box

195

Select Media screen

86

Select Network command

74

selecting alarm tones

151

applications

36, 37

chat sessions

101

dates

146

favorite buttons

45

home city

153

items in pick lists

30

items on screen

28

menu items

29

music

141

phone numbers

46

photo albums

131, 133

playlists

142

text

29, 100, 116

video albums

132, 133

wallpaper

72, 135

web links

110

wireless networks

74

self-portrait mirror

8

Send button

7, 46, 85

Send command

175

Send From pick list

175

Send To Handheld droplet

139

sending applications over

Bluetooth

175

calls to voicemail

48

email

86, 99, 109

information over Bluetooth

174

photos

86, 128, 133

text messages

47, 48, 95

to chat rooms

102

video clips

130, 133

voice memos

164

Sent folder

105

servers

23, 208

service contracts

1

setting alarm clocks

154

passwords

49, 203, 204

settings (incompatible)

213

Setup Devices button

182

Setup Devices dialog box

67,

118, 122, 182

Shift/Find indicator

32

Shift/Find key

32, 167

Short Messaging Service

(SMS)

246

shortcuts

30, 37

Show Address Bar check box

116

Show Calendar event check box

73, 151

Show Categories check box

157

Show Category Column check box

150

Show Category List check box

150, 151

Show Completed Items check box

157

Show Due Dates check box

155, 157

Show Due Tasks check box

150

Show Messages check box

150

Show Priorities check box

157

Show Records option

204,

205

Show SIM Phonebook check box

60, 61

Show Time Bars check box

150

Show timestamps in chats check box

103

Shutter sound pick list

130

Side button

7, 140, 163, 198

signal strength

76, 227

Signal Strength icon

42

signatures

94

silencing system sounds

48,

193

silencing the ringer

48

silent alarm

70, 71, 152, 193

silent alerts

104

SIM card

9, 201, 246

SIM Phonebook

58, 60, 61

SIT files

170, 171

Size button

18, 174

slide shows

132

slides

97, 246

Slideshow Setting command

133

smartcard

246

smartphone adding additional security for

205

additional information for

241

battery life for

13

charging

11, 12, 14

compatible headsets for

64

components of

1

connecting to PCs

16, 21

customizing

151, 191

defined

41


67

features described

7–8

freeing disk space on

172,

236

getting free disk space

18

getting help with

211, 241

locking

202, 203

naming

19, 220

navigating around on

25

not responding

215

overview

1

phone number for

16

precautions for

10, 13,

247, 258

preset buttons on

61

protecting

199–206

required items for

3

resetting

203, 215–217

setting owner preferences for

206

storing

7, 8

synchronization defaults for

23

third-party applications and

237

transferring data to

17, 23

transferring files to

17, 18

troubleshooting

211, 241

turning on and off

11, 41

I N D E X 293

294 I N D E X unauthorized users and

199

unsupported connections for

121

viewing signal strength for

76

SMS messaging services

246

soft resets

178, 215

software


synchronization software accessing from web browser

113

conflicts with

223

included with smartphone

2

installing

24, 170

reinstalling

224

troubleshooting

215

uninstalling

222

updating

213

Software Installation CD

2,

20, 215

songlists. See playlists

songs. See music

Sort by check box

157

Sort by Date command

101

Sort by Name command

101

Sort command

100

sorting messages

90, 100

tasks

157

Sound & Alerts Preferences screen

151, 193

sound clips

97, 98

Sound Off position (ringer)

48, 193

Sound On position (ringer)

193

sound preferences

151

sounds

97, 152, 193

Sounds button

193

Space key

31

speaker

8

speakerphone

14, 50, 228

Speakerphone button

50

special characters

32, 34, 96

specifications

259

speed-dial buttons

45, 62–63

speed-dial indicator

45

spreadsheets

79, 87, 161

Start With pick list

112

static

228, 230

statistical functions

169

statistical information

173

status icons (email)

89

status icons (phone)

75–77

stereo adapters

65, 136

stereo headsets

65, 136

Sto button (calculator)

169

stopping multimedia playback

100

music playback

141

video recording

129

voice memo playback

164

storage solutions

165

storage space. See disk

space storing images

236

information

18, 165, 185,

236

messages

105

music files

139

notes

162

photos

125, 127

smartphone

7, 8

videos

125, 128

streaming content

114, 246

style sheets

111, 116

stylus

8, 27, 30

submitting web forms

110

support (Palm)

241

support (wireless service provider)

241

Swap button

53

symbols

32, 34, 57, 96

sync. See synchronization;

synchronizing

Sync automatically check box

92

sync button

22, 24, 139

sync cable

21, 24

synchronization

ActiveSync and

94

Bluetooth devices and

181, 182

caution for

18

changing defaults for

179,

180, 181, 189

device names and

19

overview

165

preparing for

17

recommendations for

23


173

selecting applications for

179–181

setting default application for

198

setting up connections for

16

third-party applications and

215, 217, 220

transferring music files and

138

troubleshooting

220–227

wireless connections and

121


20–21, 224

Synchronize the files setting

224

synchronizing applications

23, 179

Calendar events

145

dates and time

206

information

17, 20, 23,

179

offline

224

over infrared connections

183–184

photos and videos

136

time zones

206

with Outlook

16, 21, 23,

224, 225

system colors

196

system dates and time

153,

206

system errors

223, 228, 238

system requirements personal computers

17

system resets

213, 216,

228, 238

system sounds

48, 193–194

System Volume pick list

194

T tabs

43, 52, 73

Take new picture option

97

Take new video option

97

taking pictures

127, 127–

128, 235

Tap and Drag check box

116

tapping

27, 28, 30, 196

Task Details dialog box

154,

155

tasks

See also events; Tasks

application adding

154

assigning to attachments

88, 89

checking off

155

deleting

157

displaying

145, 150, 156,

157

marking as private

155

prioritizing

155, 157

setting alarms for

155,

157

I N D E X 295

296 I N D E X setting preferences for

157

viewing due dates for

156,

157

Tasks application changing fonts for

194

opening

154


23

Tasks button

154

Tasks list

145, 155, 156, 157

Tasks Preferences screen

157

technical support (Palm)

241

technical support (wireless service provider)

241

telephone calls. See phone;

phone calls temperature conversions

169

text copying

114

entering

32, 162

finding

115, 167

highlighting

28, 29, 115

resizing

110

selecting

29, 100, 116

truncated

227

viewing against photos

150

text fields

30

text message icon

105

text messages

See also messages

addressing

95

checking status of

76, 77

containing links

99

creating

95–98

deleting

101

dialing from

46

receiving

104

requirements for

3

retrieving

77, 98


104

sending

47, 48, 95, 101

setting priority of

98

special characters and

96

troubleshooting

231

text messaging services

1,

231


5-way navigator and

27

adding security and

205

backing up information and

18, 217

beaming and

178

caller IDs and

59

caution for

198, 213

compatibility with

17, 19

deleting

18, 237

getting help with

172

hard resets and

216

installing

213, 236

manually deleting

173

reinstalling

213, 214, 217

searching in

167

transferring to expansion cards

19

troubleshooting

27, 237–

238

uninstalling

172, 216

VPN clients and

209

third-party software. See


Thumbnail View

132, 133,

136

TIF files

131

time displaying video recording

128

scheduling events and

146, 149

setting

206

synchronizing

206

viewing

152

time bars

150

time formats

195

time preferences

206

time slots (calendar)

150

Time Zone pick list

146

time zones

147, 206, 225

Timed Events check box

151

timestamps

103

tips

241

Tips command

241

Tips icon

241

to do items. See tasks

toolbars

114, 133

Totals command

56

touchscreen. See screen

Touchscreen Preferences screen

196

transactions

110, 234

transmission delays

231

Trash folder

90

travel alarm

154

Treo smartphone. See

smartphone trigonometric functions

169

troubleshooting

211, 241

truncated text

227

trusted devices

121

See also partnerships

Trusted Devices button

118,

122

Trusted Devices list

119,

121, 123, 175

trusted pairs. See

partnerships

TTY/TDD machine

75

turning on or off

Bluetooth devices

68, 175

Caps Lock

32

keyboard backlight

32

Keyguard

41, 200

microphone

130

phone

42

screen

41, 208, 229

smartphone

11, 41

speakerphone

50

touch-sensitive features

201

Typing starts contacts search option

73

U unauthorized users

199

Unfiled category

176

uninstalling

Palm desktop software

222


172, 216

Unknown Caller pick list

70

unlocking the keyboard

200

Treo smartphone

202,

203

unread messages

77, 105,

145, 150

untimed event icon

148

untimed events

147, 148,

151

Untimed Events check box

151

Up button (navigator)

28, 29,

30

updating application software

213

information

17, 23, 165


153

World Clock

153

upgrades

17–20, 62, 223

troubleshooting

213–214

uploading music files

138

uppercase letters

32

urgent messages

105

URLs

See also web links

beaming

177

I N D E X 297

298 I N D E X entering

110, 116

in text messages

99

USB hub

21, 222

USB ports

21

Use color for pick list

103

user discussion groups

241

user folders

214, 220, 246

User Guide

241

usernames

84, 85

V

Verizon Wireless preset buttons and

62

VersaMail application accessing email and

81

adding attachments from

86–87

creating email messages from

85

customizing

91–94

displaying attachments with

89

documentation for

236

Exchange ActiveSync accounts and

94

getting started with

81

opening

36, 83

overview

81

responding to messages from

88

setting up accounts with

83, 84

sorting messages with

90

switching accounts from

91

troubleshooting

230

Version button

174

version numbers

174

VGA digital camera. See

camera

Vibrate pick list

70, 71, 152

vibrating alarm

70, 71, 152,

193

video albums

129, 131, 134

video file types

97, 113, 132

video recording screen

128

Video Settings screen

130

videos adding to albums

134

adjusting volume for

130

attaching to email

86, 130

attaching to multimedia messages

97

backing up

136

copying

133

deleting

129, 136

displaying information about

135

downloading

113

grouping

132

jumping to specific sections of

130

pausing

130, 132

playing

114, 129, 132

recording

97, 128–129

removing from albums

134, 135

saving

129, 130

sending

130, 133

setting default size

130


130

storing

125, 128

viewing

130, 132, 136

View By pick list

198

viewing alerts

167


34

application information

173–174

application menus

29

applications

197

attachments

89

available disk space

18

bookmarks

111

connection status

76, 110,

120, 231, 232

contact information

45, 58


152

due dates

156, 157

email messages

87, 88

error messages

239

event categories

150

events

73, 145, 150, 151

favorite buttons

45

items in pick lists

30

multimedia messages

99

overdue tasks

145

personal calendar

145

photos

130, 131, 136

private entries

205

Quick Tour documentation

241

signal strength

76

slide shows

132

tasks

150, 156, 157

unread messages

77,

145, 150

video clips

130, 132, 136

video recording time

128

voicemail messages

76

web addresses

116

web pages

109, 110

virtual private networks

(VPNs)

208

Visibility pick list

123, 175

voice captions adding

128, 135

background music and

133

playing

132

Voice Memo application

159,

163–164

Voice Memo list

164

voice memos

98, 163, 164

voicemail checking

76

listening to

49

retrieving messages

49,

76

sending calls to

48

setting alert tones for

71

setting up

48

Voicemail Alert pick list

71

Voicemail icon

49, 76

voicemail notifications

49, 76

voicemail page icon

105

volume alarm tones

151

alert tones

71

music

141

phone

15, 71, 228

ringer

72

ringtones

70

video clips

130

voice memos

164

Volume button

7, 15, 71

volume conversions

(calculator)

169

Volume pick list

70, 71

volume preferences

193

VPN client software

209

W waking up screen

41

wallpaper

72, 135

warranty

218

web addresses

110, 115,

116

See also URLs; web links

web browser accessing email providers and

81

auto-completion options for

116

beaming from

177

bookmarking and

111,

112

customizing

115–117

deleting cookies for

117

I N D E X 299

300 I N D E X dialing phone numbers and

115

hiding toolbar in

114

opening

36, 110

overview

107, 109

restrictions for

109

selecting default views for

112

selecting home page for

116

streaming and

114

unsupported elements for

233

viewing connection status for

110

web browser application.

See Blazer web browser; web browser web browser buttons

110

web browsing

See also web browser

dial-up networking and

118, 120

from smartphone

109,

118


237

requirements for

3

restrictions for

51

secure sites and

109, 110,

234

selecting default application for

199

troubleshooting

232–234

web browsing service

1

web forms

110

Web icon

110

web links assigning to favorite buttons

63

creating email from

109

highlighting

28

Palm online support

241

selecting

110

web pages accessing

109, 111, 233

bookmarking

111–113

caching

117, 237

changing fonts for

194

changing layouts for

110

copying text from

114

disabling images for

111,

117

displaying

109, 110

finding text on

115

loading

116, 234

opening from text messages

99

opening History list for

115

optimizing

234

refreshing

111, 233

resizing text on

110

saving

111

scrolling

110, 116

selecting most recent

112

selecting phone numbers on

46

selecting text on

115, 116

sending email from

109

setting initial view for

115


115–117

viewing offline

111

web-based email

81

websites

See also web browsing

accessing

109, 110, 118

accessing Palm online support

241

browsing to secure

110

displaying recently visited

110

downloading files from

113, 131


170

redirectors and

233

submitting transactions and

110, 234

Week View

145

weight conversions

169

Wide Page Mode (browser)

110

Windows systems installing applications from

171

installing to expansion cards and

172


173

requirements for

17

sending email and

81, 91

synchronization defaults for

23

synchronizing with

179,

183, 221, 223


137, 139, 140

viewing multimedia on

136

wireless accounts. See

accounts; wireless service provider wireless connections

107,

121, 174, 175

See also connections

wireless devices. See

Bluetooth devices hands-free devices; smartphone wireless features

14, 237

wireless modems

118

wireless networks

74

wireless service provider onscreen message

76

phone services and

54, 55

smartphone requirements for

1

technical support for

241

text messaging and

1

troubleshooting connections to

234

troubleshooting Internet connections and

233

voicemail and

48

voicemail services and

48

wizards

170

WMA formats

137

Word documents

79, 87,

161

word searches

167

words, selecting

29

World Clock

152–154

World Clock icon

153

world map

153

Wrap Search check box

115

X

XLS files

Y

Year View

Z

161

145

ZIP files

170, 171

zoom settings (camera)

127

I N D E X 301

302 I N D E X